05726-050000-5000A January 2005

AutoCAD LT
2006
®
Getting Started
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES
SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time
of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio
VIZ, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision,
Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP,
AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped, bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo),
cleaner, Codec Central, combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS,
Hyperwire, i-drop, IntroDV, lustre, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Physique, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint,
RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual
Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning
Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo),
burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image),
DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG
Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, jobnet, mass, ObjectDBX,
onscreen onair online, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where
Design Connects.
Autodesk Canada Co. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame,
flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, Multi-Master Editing.
Third-Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third-Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination
with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless
as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German
Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-
Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents
Make the Transition from Paper to CAD . . . . . . . . . 1
Draw to Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Lay Out Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Organize Drawing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Establish Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Draw Efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Draw Accurately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
View Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Create Standard Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Create Dimensions and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Modify Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT. . . . . . . . . . . 23
Why You Should Use this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Get Information About AutoCAD LT . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Access Related Topics in the Help System . . . . . . . . 24
Tutorial: Use the Help System. . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Use Quick Help on the Info Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Navigate the Info Palette Content . . . . . . . . . . 29
Control the Info Palette Display Options . . . . . . . . 30
Chapter 2 Work with Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Use the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cancel a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Start a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Start Commands from Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Start Commands on the Command Line . . . . . . . . 36
Specify a Command Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Use the Dynamic Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Undo or Redo Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
iv | Contents
Chapter 3 Change Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Zoom to Magnify a View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom by Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom to a Specified Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom to Display the Entire Drawing . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pan to Reposition a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pan by Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tutorial: Zoom and Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Start a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Plan the Drawing Units and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Choose the Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Set the Format of Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Understand Models and Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Organize Drawings with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Assign Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Control Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tutorial: Tour a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 5 Draw Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Object Properties Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Assign Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Use the Properties Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Use the Properties and Layers Toolbars . . . . . . . . . 61
Tutorial: Change Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . 62
Use Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Scale Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Assign Lineweights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Create Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Draw Polylines and Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Draw Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Draw Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Draw Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Draw Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Chapter 6 Precision Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Set Grid and Snap Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Set Grid and Snap Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Set Grid Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Contents | v
Draw with Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Use Cartesian and Polar Coordinates . . . . . . . . . 76
Draw with Absolute Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . 76
Draw with Relative Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . 76
Snap to Precise Points on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Use Single Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Set Running Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Object Snap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Specify Angles and Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Use Polar Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specify Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specify an Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tutorial: Draw with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter 7 Make Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Select Objects to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Object Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Specify a Selection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Erase, Extend, and Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Erase Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Extend Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Duplicate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Copy Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Offset Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Mirror Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Move and Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Move Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fillet Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tutorial: Modify Objects with Precision. . . . . . . . . 97
Tutorial: Create a New Drawing with Precision . . . . . . 103
Match Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Use Editing Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Edit with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Create Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Analyze Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
vi | Contents
Chapter 8 Add Symbols and Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Overview of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Benefits of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Sources of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Insert Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Tutorial: Adding Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Overview of Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Use Standard Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Associative Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Insert Hatches or Solid Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Define Hatch Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Tutorial: Add Hatches to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . .122
Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Create and Modify Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Work with Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Create and Modify Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . .129
Set Text Size in Model Space. . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Chapter 10 Add Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Dimensions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Parts of a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Associative Dimensions and Leaders . . . . . . . . . .134
Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Tutorial: Create Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Use Dimensioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Create Center Marks and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Create Leaders with Annotation . . . . . . . . . . .139
Create and Modify Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Modify Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Work with Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Create a New Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Use Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . .149
Tutorial: Work with Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . .149
Contents | vii
Choose and Configure Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Add a Plotter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Change a Plotter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Use Plot Styles to Override Properties . . . . . . . . . 152
Plot from a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Page Setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tutorial: Plot a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
viii
Make the Transition from Paper to
CAD
2 | Introduction
Draw to Scale
Drawing scale is something you consider when laying out your drawing. You establish scale
differently in CAD than you do with manual drafting.
With manual drafting, you
must determine the scale of a
view before you start drawing.
This scale compares the size
of the actual object to the size
of the model drawn on paper.
In AutoCAD LT, you first
decide what units of
measurement you will use,
and then draw your model at
1:1 scale.
For example, when you draw a motor part, the
length of one unit might equal one millimeter
or one inch. When you draw a map, one unit
might equal one kilometer or one mile.
This drawing of a mechanical carriage uses
millimeters for the length of one unit. Views of
the part were scaled later to create the layout
for the printed drawing.
R7.39
REF.
R5.39
R7.49
R3.15
R3.63
Ø1.90
R13.30
2X
PA66-GF33 SAE
4X
R11.64
Ø1.90
Ø2.50
3X
10.55
5.95
6.83
135°
113°
7.53
R3.55 3X
0.99
0.57
1.28
1.23
Draw the object at 1:1 scale in the units you
choose.
When you lay out and plot your drawing, you
can specify any scale.
0.01 A
0.01 A
NOTE 7
SEE DETAÌL B
NOTE 4
SHAFT DETAÌL
NOTE 6
Ø3.49
Ø1.90
R13.30
2X
PA66-GF33 SAE
1.40
37.40, NOTE 9
1.75
2.32
3.60
18.57
4X
11.25
Ø4.82
R11.64
Ø1.90
Ø2.50
3X
Ø3.29
6.75
7.57
10.55
5.95
6.83
135°
113°
7.53
3.43
1.90
6X
R3.55 3X
0.99
0.57
1.28
1.23
R7.39
REF.
R5.39
R7.49
R3.15
R3.63
R2.0
2X
26.15
3.0 2.0
Ø7.25
8.92
14.50
2 SLOTS
4 | Introduction
Lay Out Your Drawing
On paper, a layout is constrained by the sheet size you use. In CAD, you are not limited to one
particular layout or sheet size.
When you draft manually, you
first select a sheet, which usually
includes a preprinted border and
title block. Then you determine
the location for views—plans,
elevations, sections, and details.
Finally, you start to draw.
With AutoCAD LT, you first draw
your design, or model, in a
working environment called model
space. You can then create a layout
for that model in an environment called paper
space.
A layout represents a drawing sheet. It typically
contains a border, title block, dimensions, general
notes, and one or more views of the model
displayed in layout viewports. Layout viewports are
areas, similar to picture frames or windows,
through which you can see your model. You scale
the views in viewports by zooming in or out.
In this drawing of a cottage, layout viewports
display the model in plan and elevation views.
You create your basic design, or
model, in a drawing area called model
space.
When you’re ready to print, you can arrange
different views of your model in a layout.
PROPOSED GROUND FLOOR PLAN
"C"
"A"
PROPOSED ELEVATÌON 'A-A' [SOUTH].
"C"
"B"
'X' 'X'
'Y'
'Y'
'Z' 'Z'
6 | Introduction
Organize Drawing Information
In both manual drafting and CAD, you need a way to organize your drawing content—a method for
separating, sorting, and editing specific drawing data.
With manual drafting, you can separate
information onto individual transparent
overlays. For example, a building plan might
contain separate overlays for its structural,
electrical, and plumbing components.
In AutoCAD LT, layers are equivalent to
transparent overlays. As with overlays, you can
display, edit, and print layers separately or in
combination.
You can name layers to help track content, and lock layers so
they can't be altered. Assigning settings such as color, linetype, or
lineweight to layers helps you comply with industry standards.
You can also use layers to organize drawing objects for plotting.
Assigning a plot style to a layer makes all the objects drawn on
that layer plot in a similar manner.
This drawing of a press uses layers to define different linetypes
and colors.
Turn off layers to hide complex
details as you work.
Display layers when you need
to see all components.
8 | Introduction
Establish Drafting Standards
Whether you work as a member of a team or on an individual project, developing standards is a
requirement for efficient communication.
Manual drafting requires meticulous
accuracy in drawing linetypes,
lineweights, text, dimensions, and
more. Standards must be established
in the beginning and applied
consistently.
With AutoCAD LT, you can ensure
conformity to industry or company
standards by creating styles that you
can apply consistently.
You can create styles for text, dimensions, and
linetypes. A text style, for example, establishes font and
format characteristics such as height, width, and slant.
You can save styles, layers, layouts, title block and
border information, and some command settings in
drawing template files. Using drawing templates helps
you quickly start new drawings that conform to
standards.
This drawing of a roadway plan uses styles to maintain
drafting standards for text, dimensioning, and
linetypes.
Dimension, text, and linetype
styles can be established in a
template drawing and used for
creating new drawings.
10 | Introduction
Draw Efficiently
Draw with less effort and revise with more speed: these are the two main reasons you use CAD.
AutoCAD LT has a complete set of drawing and editing tools to help eliminate repetitive, time-
consuming drafting tasks.
With manual drafting, you use drawing
tools that include pencils, scales,
compasses, parallel rules, templates, and
erasers. Repetitive drawing and editing
tasks must be done manually.
In AutoCAD LT, you can choose from a
variety of drawing tools that create lines,
circles, spline curves, and more.
You can easily move, copy, offset, rotate,
and mirror objects. You can also copy objects between
open drawings.
In this drawing of a trolley, copying and mirroring were
used to create repeated and symmetrical features.
Offsetting was also used to draw parallel lines more
efficiently.
You can save drafting time by drawing one
half of an item and then mirroring it to create
the other half.
12 | Introduction
Draw Accurately
Engineering and architectural drawings require a high degree of accuracy. With CAD, you draft more
accurately than with manual methods.
On paper, you must draw objects
carefully to ensure correct size and
alignment. Objects drawn to scale
must be manually verified and
dimensioned.
In AutoCAD LT, you can use several
methods to obtain exact
dimensions.
The simplest method is to locate
points by snapping to an interval on
a rectangular grid.
Another method is to specify exact coordinates.
Coordinates specify a drawing location by indicating
a point along an X and Y axis or a distance and angle
from another point.
With object snaps, you can snap to locations on
existing objects, such as an endpoint of an arc, the
midpoint of a line, or the center point of a circle.
With polar tracking, you can snap to previously set
angles and specify distances along those angles.
In this drawing of a pumping station, object snaps were
used to ensure that lines connected perfectly. Polar
tracking was used to draw lines at correct angles.
The polar tracking feature
displays visual guidelines at
specific angles and can snap
the cursor to an angle.
With object
snaps, when you
place your cursor
here…
you can snap to the
center point
automatically.
14 | Introduction
View Your Drawing
The power of CAD makes it easy for you to quickly view different parts of your design at different
magnifications.
When you draft on paper, the
size and resolution of your
drawing is fixed.
In CAD, the size and resolution
of your drawing can be changed
as needed.
To do detailed work, you can
increase display size by zooming
in. You can zoom out to display
more of the drawing. To move
to another section of a drawing, you pan the
drawing without changing magnification.
You can zoom and pan to create the best working
conditions. This can be invaluable when working
on large and detailed drawings, such as this
health spa plan.
You can zoom out to see more of your
design, or zoom in to see more detail.
You can pan to shift to another area of your
design.
16 | Introduction
Create Standard Symbols
Symbols have long been used in manual drafting as a way to represent real-world objects in a
simplified way. The ability to create and reuse standard symbols is one of CAD’s greatest strengths.
With manual drafting, you
might use a symbol template
or printed stickers to draw
repetitive landscape,
architectural, mechanical, or
electrical symbols. This
method, however, limits the
possible variations of a
symbol.
In CAD, you can save time by
inserting copies of existing
symbols anywhere in your
drawing, at any rotation or
scale.
When you need to create a custom symbol,
you combine several objects into a single
object called a block. You then can insert the
block as many times as needed into any
drawing using DesignCenter.
Standard landscaping symbols are used
extensively in this drawing of a residential
landscaping plan.
DesignCenter helps you locate libraries (collections)
of blocks that you can drag onto your drawing or onto
a tool palette. You can browse and preview blocks
from drawings stored on your computer, on a
company network, or on a website.
UW 217
UW 217
UW 217
PR6223
PR6223
PR6223
PR6223
PR6223
PR6223
GW5252
GW5252
GW5252
17
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
GR 3217
18 | Introduction
Create Dimensions and Text
Creating accurate dimensions and consistent, legible text is a time-consuming task for the manual
drafter. CAD provides ways to streamline this task.
When you work on paper, if
you resize any part of the
drawing, you must erase and
then redraw the dimensions.
Changing text can often
involve relettering the whole
drawing.
In AutoCAD LT, you create
associative dimensions and text
on the layout in paper space.
Associative dimensions are tied
to the underlying model. Changes to the model
automatically update the dimension values.
Standard types of dimensions in AutoCAD LT
include linear, radial, ordinate, angular,
baseline, and more.
You can easily revise the content, font, size,
spacing, and rotation of text in dimensions and
notes.
In this detail drawing of a gutter, the text,
leaders, and dimensions describe the required
hardware.
If you make dimensions associative, you can update the
dimension size and value automatically when you
stretch or scale the dimensioned object.
You can create leader lines with associated text. If you
move the text, the leader is adjusted automatically.
L
20 | Introduction
Modify Your Drawing
Revisions are a part of any drawing project. Whether you work on paper or with CAD, you will need
to modify your drawing in some way.
On paper you must erase and redraw to make revisions to your drawing manually.
AutoCAD LT eliminates tedious manual editing by providing a variety of editing
tools. If you need to copy all or part of an object, you don’t have to redraw it. If you
need to remove an object, you can erase it with a few clicks of the mouse. And if
you make an error, you can quickly undo your actions.
Once you draw an object, you never need to redraw it. You can modify existing
objects by mirroring, rotating, scaling, stretching, trimming, and more. You can
also change object properties, such as linetype, lineweight, color, and layer, at any
time.
These before-and-after drawings show some typical edits to a house elevation. The revision cloud
feature is used to mark areas of change.
Once you draw something, you can easily copy it without
having to re-create it.
22
An Introduction to AutoCAD LT
Why You Should Use this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Get Information About AutoCAD LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Access Related Topics in the Help System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tutorial: Use the Help System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Use Quick Help on the Info Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Navigate the Info Palette Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Control the Info Palette Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
24 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT
Why You Should Use this Guide
This Getting Started guide provides an introduction to the most commonly used features of AutoCAD
LT. Use it to learn the basic features so you can begin working quickly.
AutoCAD LT has a rich set of features and there are often many ways of accomplishing a task. This
guide focuses on the following:
■ What do you need to know to get started?
■ What is the recommended method for using the features presented?
After you become more familiar with AutoCAD LT, you will find your own ways of working
efficiently based on the type of work that you do.
NOTE The tutorials in this guide assume that you are is using the default settings of AutoCAD LT for
display and behavior. If the settings have been customized, you might want to ask for help.
Get Information About AutoCAD LT
Additional resources are available when you need more information. From the Help menu, you can
access the following resources:
■ Help provides procedures, conceptual information, and command descriptions. You can also
press F1 at the Command prompt, in a dialog box, or at a prompt within a command to display
Help information.
■ Info Palette automatically displays procedures that are relevent to the active command.
■ New Features Workshop provides a series of overviews about new features.
■ Additional Online Resources provides several options for additional help from the Web.
NOTE The Quick Reference card at the end of this guide provides an easy-to-use graphical key to the
product interface, toolbars, shortcut keys, system variables, command aliases, and basic operations such
as selecting objects.
Access Related Topics in the Help System
Keyword references are displayed at the end of most Getting Started topics. For example, the
following information indicates that you can find concepts, procedures, commands, and system
variables related to LAYOUT by entering layout in the Index tab of the Help window.
Help system
LAYOUT
Try it: Locate a Help topic using a keyword
■ Start AutoCAD LT and press the F1 key. Then follow the steps in the illustration.
Get Information About AutoCAD LT | 25
Tutorial: Use the Help System
In this tutorial, you will use the Help system to find information about how to start a drawing with
a template file and how to create a layout.
NOTE It is important to learn how to use the Help system effectively. The Help system can provide
answers that keep you from needless frustration.
1 Start AutoCAD LT and press F1 to display the Help window.
2 In the left pane of the Help window, click the Contents tab if necessary to display the table of
contents. Then click the plus sign (+) next to User’s Guide.
The User’s Guide expands to display a list of chapters.
2 Enter a
keyword
3 Double-
click to view
a topic
4 Click to display a concept
related to the selected topic
5 Click to list
procedures related to
the selected topic
6 Click to list
commands related to
the selected topic
1 Click the
Index tab
26 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT
3 In the left pane, click directly on the title, Start, Organize, and Save a Drawing. The right pane of
the Help window displays links to several topics, with descriptions for each one.
4 In the right pane, click Start a Drawing. Then click Use a Template File to Start a Drawing.
You have navigated to a destination topic in the Help system. Notice that the table of contents
in the left pane displays the topic structure for easy navigation.
5 Click the Procedures tab. Then click the first procedure on the list. Click the Procedures tab to
redisplay the list.
6 Click the Commands tab. The Commands tab lists all commands and system variables that are
associated with this topic.
If you click a link on this tab, the Command Reference is opened in Help, and provides details
about command and dialog box options.
Get Information About AutoCAD LT | 27
7 Next, in the left pane, click the Search tab.
You will now locate topics that contain the word layout.
8 Type the word layout and press ENTER or click List Topics.
A large number of topics that contain the word layout are displayed.
9 Click the column labeled Title to sort the list of topics alphabetically. Then, click the column
labeled Location to sort the list of topics by book: Command Reference, Customization Guide, User’s
Guide, and so on.
10 Scroll down to find the User’s Guide topic, Work on a Layout Tab-Concepts. Then click Display (or
double-click the topic).
The topic is displayed. But how do you know where you are in the table of contents? How can
you display an adjacent, related topic?
11 In the left pane, click the Contents tab.
The table of contents opens to the current topic. Use this method to find related topics easily.
Note If the table of contents does not automatically open to the current topic, click the Concepts
tab in the right pane.
28 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT
12 In the left pane, right-click any topic and then click Close All.
This is a quick method for collapsing the table of contents when too many subtopics are
displayed.
13 Close the Help window.
For more information, read Use the Help System Efficiently. In the Help system, on the Contents tab,
click User’s Guide ➤ Find the Information You Need ➤ Use the Help System Efficiently.
Use Quick Help on the Info Palette | 29
Use Quick Help on the Info Palette
Quick Help on the Info palette provides convenient access to procedures in the Help system. During
most activities, Quick Help displays a list of procedures that are relevent to the current command.
You can click on a procedure to display it in the palette.
Often, the guidance you get from Quick Help is just enough to get you started performing unfamiliar
or rarely used tasks.
Usually, the Quick Help information is updated as you start new commands; however, if you need
to freeze the information so it doesn’t change as you change commands, you can lock the Info
palette.
Navigate the Info Palette Content
You can right-click in the Info palette to display a shortcut menu with navigation commands. Use
these commands to move forward and backward through viewed topics or return to Home in the
Info palette, as you would in a web browser. You can click the title banner at the top of the Info
palette to display a list of all commands and system variables in the product.
right-click in the palette
or on the title bar to
display a shortcut menu
display reference
information
choose a procedure
title bar
30 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT
Control the Info Palette Display Options
You can access the options and settings for the Info palette from the shortcut menu displayed when
you right-click the title bar of the Info palette. These settings include
■ Auto-hide. The Info palette can automatically roll open or roll away when your cursor moves over
the title bar of the Info palette.
■ Transparency. The Info palette can be made transparent so it does not obscure objects under it.
NOTE The title bar can appear on either the left side or right side of the palette, depending on where
the palette is dragged.
Help system
HELP, ASSIST
Review and Recall
1 What is the purpose of the tabs in the right pane of the Help window?
2 In the left pane of the Help window, when would you use the Contents tab rather than the Index tab?
3 From what menu can you get information about new features in AutoCAD LT?
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Access the Help system Help ➤ Help Standard
Use New Features Workshop Help ➤ New Features
Workshop
Find training resources Help ➤ Additional Online
Resources ➤ Training
Use Quick Help on the Info palette Help ➤ Info Palette
Print a Quick Help procedure Right-click for shortcut menu
Lock a Quick Help procedure Right-click for shortcut menu
Draw toolbar
Contains
buttons that
create new
objects.
Properties toolbar
Displays and
controls color,
linetype, line-
weight, and plot
style properties.
Command window
Displays commands in progress,
options, and command history.
Status bar
Indicates
coordinate
values and
the status of
drawing
aids.
DesignCenter (can be
docked or floating).
Use to locate and place
drawing content into
drawings and onto tool
palettes.
Drawing area The area of the
AutoCAD LT window where you
create and edit drawings.
Model and layout tabs Provide two working environments.
Layers toolbar Displays and
controls layer settings.
Styles toolbar Displays and
controls text settings.
Tool Palettes window
(can be docked or
floating). Use to drag
frequently used blocks
and hatches into
drawings.
Standard toolbar Contains
buttons for standard operations.
Menu bar Provides menu
access to all commands.
Work with Commands
Use the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cancel a Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Start a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Start Commands from Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Start Commands on the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Specify a Command Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Use the Dynamic Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Undo or Redo Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
34 | Chapter 2 Work with Commands
Use the Mouse
Most people use a mouse as their pointing device. On a two-button mouse, the left button is usually
the pick button, used to specify points or select objects in the drawing area. With the right button,
you can display a shortcut menu that contains relevant commands and options. Different shortcut
menus are displayed depending on where you move the cursor.
NOTE To see what options are available in any situation, try right-clicking to display a shortcut menu.
A wheel mouse is a two-button mouse with a small wheel between the buttons. This wheel can be
rotated or pressed down to zoom and pan your drawing quickly. It is highly recommended that you
use a wheel mouse.
Cancel a Command
If you accidentally click in the screen, display a shortcut menu, or start a command, you can always
escape by pressing the ESC key on your keyboard.
Try it: Cancel a selection
■ Click in the drawing area and move the mouse. AutoCAD LT is in a selection mode. Press ESC to
cancel.
Start a Command
You can start a command using a menu, a toolbar, a palette, or the command line. Because AutoCAD
LT is very flexible, you can work in the way that feels most comfortable to you.
You can choose commands from several different kinds of menus in AutoCAD LT:
■ Pull-down menus are available from the menu bar at the top of the AutoCAD LT window. All the
commands for the tutorials in this book are accessible from these menus.
specify points or select objects display a shortcut menu
Start a Command | 35
■ The Object Snap menu is displayed when you hold down SHIFT and click the right mouse button.
Object snaps facilitate precision drawing by snapping the cursor onto a feature on an object such
as the endpoint of a line or the center of a circle.
■ Shortcut menus are displayed when you click the right mouse button. Different menus are
displayed when you right-click an object, right-click in the drawing area, right-click a toolbar, or
right-click within a dialog box, palette, or window.
Start Commands from Menus
Toolbars contain buttons that start commands. When you move the pointing device over a button,
a tooltip displays its name.
Dock, Resize, and Float Toolbars
A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area.
■ You can float a docked toolbar by clicking its move handle and dragging it anywhere in the
drawing area.
■ You can resize a floating toolbar by dragging any edge.
■ You can dock a floating toolbar by clicking its title bar and dragging it to an edge of the drawing
area. Press the CTRL key to prevent docking.
Hide, Display, and Lock Toolbars
■ You can display or hide toolbars by right-clicking any toolbar and, on the shortcut menu, clicking
the toolbar that you want to display or hide.
■ You can lock toolbars in place using the same shortcut menu and clicking one of the Lock options
at the bottom of the menu.
Try it: Resize and position the Draw toolbar
In this tutorial, you can practice moving, resizing, and docking the Draw toolbar.
NOTE When you are instructed to “drag,” click and hold down the left mouse button, move the cursor,
and then release the mouse button.
1 To make space, close any open palettes in the drawing area by clicking the [x] in their title bars.
2 On the left side of the application window, drag the move handle on the Draw toolbar to the
center of the drawing area.
3 Move the cursor to the bottom of the Draw toolbar, where it changes into an up-down cursor.
4 Drag the bottom of the Draw toolbar to change its shape.
5 Click the [x] in the upper-right corner of the Draw toolbar to close it.
You can easily redisplay the Draw toolbar or any other toolbar.
move handle
36 | Chapter 2 Work with Commands
6 Right-click any toolbar to display a shortcut menu that contains a list of toolbars. On the
shortcut menu, click Draw to redisplay the Draw toolbar.
7 Drag the title bar of the Draw toolbar to the left edge of the application window. When the
toolbar outline changes shape, release the left mouse button to dock the toolbar.
NOTE If you move a toolbar past the edge of your screen, it may be hard to find, but a sliver of the
toolbar will be visible and you can drag it back. If you drag the toolbar behind the Microsoft Windows
taskbar at the bottom of your screen, you need to set the Windows taskbar properties to “Auto-hide” to
retrieve the toolbar.
Start Commands on the Command Line
You can initiate AutoCAD LT commands by typing them on the command line within the command
window instead of using toolbars or menus. Additionally, some commands must be completed on the
command line, regardless of how they are started.
Some commands have abbreviated names or command aliases. For example, you can enter c as an
alias for CIRCLE. See the Quick Reference card at the back of this guide for more information.
After you type the command on the command line, press ENTER or SPACEBAR to execute the
command. You can also repeat the previous command by pressing ENTER or SPACEBAR.
NOTE In this guide and in the Help system, when you are instructed to enter something, type the bold-
face value on the command line, and then press the ENTER key.
Specify a Command Option
When you start a command, AutoCAD LT often displays a set of options on the command line. For
example, when you enter the CIRCLE command, the following prompt is displayed on the
command line:
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]:
The default option, “Specify center point for circle,” is displayed before the square brackets. Alternate
options are displayed between the aquare brackets.
■ To accept the default option, enter coordinate values, or use the pointing device to click a center
point in the drawing area.
■ To choose a different option, enter the capitalized letters in the option name. For example, type
2P and press ENTER to choose the Two-Point option.
command window
command line
Start a Command | 37
Use the Dynamic Prompt
In addition to the prompt on the command line, a similar prompt is displayed next to the cursor
called the dynamic prompt.
With the dynamic prompt, you can keep your eyes on your work and you don’t have to look down
to the command line.
To display command options in the dynamic input prompt, press the DOWN ARROW key, and then
click an option on the menu.
Try it: Use a menu to draw a line
1 On the menu bar, click the Draw menu and then click Line.
In future steps, this is abbreviated Click Draw menu ➤ Line.
2 At the Specify First Point prompt, click anywhere in the drawing area to locate a point.
The prompt changes: Specify Next Point or [Undo].
3 At the Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt, click anywhere else in the drawing area to specify the
endpoint of the line segment.
4 Create a second line segment by clicking again to locate another point.
The Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt is repeated so you can continue to draw segments until
you end the LINE command.
5 Press ENTER to end the LINE command.
The two line segments that you just created share an endpoint, but are separate objects.
6 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase, and click each line. Then press ENTER to execute the erase
command.
Try it: Use a button on a toolbar to draw a line
1 On the Draw toolbar, which is located on the left edge of the application window, click the Line
button.
2 Draw two line segments.
38 | Chapter 2 Work with Commands
3 On the Modify toolbar, which is located on the right edge of the application window, click the
Erase button.
4 Click each line and then press ENTER to erase the lines.
Try it: Use the command line to draw a line
1 On the command line, type line or the letter L. Press ENTER.
2 Click anywhere in the drawing area to locate a point.
3 At the Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt, click anywhere else in the drawing area to specify
the endpoint of the line segment.
4 At the Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt, click anywhere else in the drawing area to specify
the endpoint of the line segment.
5 Type u and press ENTER to undo the last line segment and click another location for the
endpoint.
6 Then type c (Close) and press ENTER to add a third line segment that connects to the initial point
and ends the command.
Try it: Use the command line to draw a circle
1 On the command line, enter circle or the letter c (type c and press ENTER).
2 At the Specify Center Point for Circle prompt, click anywhere in the drawing area to locate a
point.
3 At the Specify Radius of Circle prompt, enter 5 (type 5 and press ENTER).
4 On the command line, press ENTER to repeat the CIRCLE command.
5 Enter 2P to create a circle using two points (type 2P and press ENTER).
6 Click anywhere in the drawing to locate each point.
7 Repeat the CIRCLE command several more times, using each of the other options.
8 When you’re done, enter erase or e, and click each circle to select it. Then press ENTER to erase
the selected circles.
Use the dynamic prompt to draw a circle
1 At the dynamic prompt, enter circle or the letter c.
2 At the Specify Center Point for Circle prompt, press the DOWN ARROW key.
3 Click one of the CIRCLE options on the menu and complete the command.
Undo or Redo Commands | 39
Undo or Redo Commands
Occasionally you will need to undo some of your work. Two Standard toolbar buttons reverse
mistakes in your drawings.
■ Undo. You can backtrack previous actions. For example, click Undo to delete an object that you
just created.
■ Redo. You can reinstate the actions that you backtracked with Undo. For example, click Redo to
re-create the object that you just undid.
You can use the Undo and Redo lists to reverse more than one action at a time. Click the Undo or
Redo list arrow and then click to select the actions.
Help system
OPTIONS, U, UNDO, REDO
Review and Recall
1 What can you do to display a list of all available toolbars?
2 What are three ways that you can start a command?
3 What other key can you use to end or repeat a command in addition to ENTER?
4 What should you do to cancel a command?
To get started
Action Menu Keyboard
End a command Right-click ➤ Enter ENTER or SPACEBAR
Repeat a command Right-click ➤ Repeat ENTER or SPACEBAR
Cancel a command Right-click ➤ Cancel ESC
Undo the previous command Edit ➤ Undo <action> U and press ENTER
Redo list Undo list
It will be easier to create or modify objects in
this drawing by zooming in to magnify the
view.
After you finish working on an area, you can
zoom out to get a better overall view.
Once you have zoomed in, you can pan the
view to center the objects you are working on.
Change Views
Zoom to Magnify a View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom by Moving the Cursor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom to a Specified Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom to Display the Entire Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pan to Reposition a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pan by Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tutorial: Zoom and Pan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
42 | Chapter 3 Change Views
Zoom to Magnify a View
A view is a specific magnification, position, and orientation of your design. The most common way
to change a view is zooming. Zooming increases or decreases the magnification of the image
displayed in the drawing area.
AutoCAD LT provides several methods for zooming in your drawings.
Zoom by Moving the Cursor
You can use a pointing device to zoom in real time—that is, to zoom in or out by moving the cursor.
With the Realtime option of the ZOOM command, you drag the cursor up to zoom in; drag it down
to zoom out. If you use a wheel mouse, rotate the top of the wheel forward to zoom in and rotate it
backward to zoom out.
Zoom to a Specified Area
With the Window option of the ZOOM command, you can quickly zoom in on a specific area by
using the mouse to define a rectangular zoom window. The area you define is centered in the new
view.
Zoom to Display the Entire Drawing
Use the Extents option of the ZOOM command to display the entire drawing. This is useful when
you need to return to an overall view quickly. This option is also useful if your drawing area is blank
as a result of zooming in too close on a blank area or panning too far off the drawing area.
zoomed out zoomed in
Pan to Reposition a View | 43
Pan to Reposition a View
Panning is another common way to change a view. Panning moves the position of the image
displayed in any two-dimensional direction.
Pan by Moving the Cursor
You can pan in real time—that is, use the pointing device to reposition the image in the drawing
area. Within the PAN command, drag the cursor to pan the image to a new location. If you use a
wheel mouse, hold the wheel down and move the mouse to pan.
Tutorial: Zoom and Pan
In this tutorial, you can practice zooming and panning operations using the commands on the View
menu or directly with a wheel mouse.
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Open dialog box, find the /Sample folder in the AutoCAD LT product folder. Click on each
drawing file and open one that looks interesting.
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Window.
4 Click somewhere near the center of the drawing. Move your cursor to form a rectangular area
and click again.
5 Click View menu ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime.
6 Drag the cursor in any direction to reposition the view. Press ESC to end the operation.
7 Continue to practice zooming and panning with these options:
■ Zoom Realtime (drag the cursor up and down, press ESC to end.)
■ Zoom Previous
■ Zoom Window
■ Zoom Extents
■ Pan Realtime
before PAN after PAN
44 | Chapter 3 Change Views
Practice these options until you are comfortable with zooming and panning. These are the most
common options for drawing in 2D.
Note If you zoom in and you notice that arcs and circles lose their smoothness, or if you can’t zoom
in or out beyond a limit, you can regenerate the display. Click View menu ➤ Regen All. This
command also removes stray pixels.
8 (Optional) If you have a wheel mouse, you can zoom and pan without entering a command. Try
the following operations:
■ Move your cursor to an area in the drawing and rotate the wheel forward and backward to
zoom in and out. Notice that your cursor location determines the stationary reference point
of your zoom operation.
■ Press the wheel down and drag the view to pan it.
■ Double-click the wheel to zoom to the extents of the drawing.
9 Close the sample drawing without saving it.
Help system
PAN, ZOOM, REGEN
Review and Recall
1 What ZOOM option should you use to fit your entire drawing into the drawing area?
2 What is a fast way to redisplay the previous view?
3 What command smooths the display of curves and removes stray pixels?
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Pan View ➤ Pan Standard
Zoom View ➤ Zoom Standard
Reset the display limit for zooming View ➤ Regen
Smooth arcs and circles View ➤ Regen
Establish layers to organize
information as if on transparent
drawing overlays.
Assign standard lineweights to
ensure that lines will plot the
same way regardless of drawing
scale.
Use various linetypes to
help identify different types
of objects.
Drawing Setup
Start a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Plan the Drawing Units and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Choose the Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Set the Format of Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Understand Models and Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Organize Drawings with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Assign Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Control Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tutorial: Tour a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
48 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup
Start a Drawing
AutoCAD LT offers several ways to start a new drawing. The recommended method is to start with
a drawing template file.
A drawing template file contains predefined settings, standards, and definitions that will save you
significant setup time. When you start a drawing with a drawing template, these settings are passed
on to the new drawing. Drawing template files include settings and basic drawing elements that you
will use often, such as
■ Unit type and precision
■ Tool settings and preferences
■ Layer organization
■ Title blocks, borders, and logos
■ Dimension styles
■ Text styles
■ Linetypes and lineweights
■ Plot styles
Your AutoCAD LT installation folder includes many drawing template files, including some that
facilitate compliance with ANSI, DIN, ISO, and JIS standards. Nevertheless, it is very likely that you
will customize one or more of these, or build your own drawing template files to meet your standards
and requirements.
You can create a drawing template file by saving a drawing using the .dwt extension.
drawing template file saved
with title block
Start a Drawing | 49
Try it: Open a drawing template file
1 Click File menu ➤ New.
2 In the Select Template dialog box, click one of the following drawing template files and then
click Open.
■ Tutorial-mArch.dwt. Sample architectural template (metric)
■ Tutorial-mMfg.dwt. Sample mechanical design template (metric)
■ Tutorial-iArch.dwt. Sample architectural template (imperial)
■ Tutorial-iMfg.dwt. Sample mechanical design template (imperial)
The metric template files are scaled to use millimeters as the drawing unit, and the imperial template
files are scaled to use inches as the drawing unit.
50 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup
Plan the Drawing Units and Scale
In AutoCAD LT, you don’t need to worry about setting a scale before you start drawing. Even though
you eventually print or plot to paper at a specified scale, you create the model in AutoCAD LT at 1:1
scale. However, before you start a drawing, you must first decide what drawing units you will use.
Choose the Drawing Units
In AutoCAD LT, distances are measured in drawing units. In a drawing, one drawing unit may equal
one inch, one millimeter, one meter, or one mile.
Before you begin drawing, you decide what one drawing unit will represent—there is no setting in
AutoCAD LT that determines the length of a drawing unit.
Set the Format of Drawing Units
After you decide what drawing units to use, you can set the format of the drawing units. The format
settings available for linear units are as follows:
■ Architectural. A length of 15.5 units displays as 1’-3 1/2”
■ Decimal. A length of 15.5 units displays as 15.5000
■ Engineering. A length of 15.5 units displays as 1’-3.5”
■ Fractional. A length of 15.5 units displays as 15 1/2
■ Scientific. A length of 15.5 units displays as 1.5000E+1
For example, if you are a mechanical engineer or architect who normally works in millimeters, you
would set the format for linear units to decimal. If you are an architect who normally works in feet
and inches, you would set the format to architectural.
Shaft
1 unit = 1 mm
(grid spacing = 2 mm)
Office plan
1 unit = 1 inch
(grid spacing = 12 inches)
Plan the Drawing Units and Scale | 51
The drawing unit format controls only the display style of the drawing units on-screen, such as in
the display of coordinates and values in the Properties palette, dialog boxes, and prompts.
Try it: Check the drawing unit format and precision
1 Click Format menu ➤ Units. In the Drawing Units dialog box, notice the display style selected
for linear and for angular units.
Note Think of this dialog box as the Drawing Units Format dialog box.
2 Notice the value displayed under Precision. This represents the decimal or fractional rounding
of values displayed on-screen.
3 Close the dialog box.
52 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup
Understand Models and Layouts
AutoCAD LT provides two parallel working environments represented by the Model and layout tabs.
Working on the Model tab, you draw a full-size model of your subject. On the layout tabs, you can
arrange multiple “snapshots” of the model.
■ The Model tab accesses a limitless drawing area. In model space, you first decide whether one
unit represents one millimeter, one meter, one inch, or some other drawing unit. Next, you set
the drawing unit format. Then you draw at 1:1 scale.
■ Layout tabs access drawing layouts. When you set up a layout, you specify the paper size you
want to use. The layout represents a printed drawing sheet in which you can display one or more
views of the model at various scales. This layout environment is called paper space. Here you create
layout viewports that act as windows into model space. Each layout viewport can contain a
different view of the model.
full-size model of a part
created at 1:1 scale
layout with title block and rectangular
layout viewports that contain scaled views
layout with viewports using different scales
Understand Models and Layouts | 53
Try it: Switch between the Model and layout tabs
1 At the bottom-left of the display area, click the Model tab. This is where you create and modify
the geometry for your model.
2 Click the layout tab to the right of the Model tab.
The layout has already been prepared, including a sample title block and a layout viewport, the
blue rectangle.
3 On the layout tab, double-click anywhere within the rectangular viewport area. This is how you
will later access model space to pan the model space view and to add dimensions.
Notice that the border of the layout viewport becomes thicker and the crosshairs cursor is active
only within the layout viewport.
4 Double-click in a blank area outside the rectangular viewport. This returns you to paper space.
The border of the layout viewport is no longer as thick and the crosshairs cursor is active within
the entire drawing area.
54 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup
Organize Drawings with Layers
Layers are the equivalent of the overlays used in manual drafting. They are an important
organizational tool in AutoCAD LT.
Each layer includes an assigned color, linetype, and lineweight. Before you create objects, you set the
layer on which the objects are to be created. This is called the current layer. By default, AutoCAD LT
assigns the current layer’s color, linetype, and lineweight automatically to the new objects you
create.
Assign Layers
You can organize the drawing by assigning similar components to the same layer. For example, you
can create a layer called Electrical and assign it the color green. Whenever you draw electrical
objects, you switch to that layer. The objects you draw are created on the Electrical layer and are
colored green.
Later, if you don’t want to view or plot electrical objects, you can turn off that layer.
NOTE It is very important to establish a company-wide layer standard. With a layer standard, drawing
organization will be more logical, consistent, compatible, and maintainable over time. Layer standards
are essential for team projects.
Try it: Display the list of layers in a drawing
1 Click Format menu ➤ Layer.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, notice the name and default properties assigned to each layer.
These layers are just a sample of the types of layers that you will need to use in a well-organized
drawing. There are many layer standards already in use, including those specified in companies
and those recommended by professional organizations.
3 Enlarge the right side of the dialog box to display all of the columns. Click the titles of the Status,
Color, and Name columns to rearrange the order of the layers.
Review the descriptions of each layer in the column on the far right.
walls
furniture
all layers
electrical
Organize Drawings with Layers | 55
Control Layers
To make objects on a layer invisible, you can turn off the layer or freeze it in the Layer Properties
Manager. You can also lock layers to reduce the possibility of modifying objects accidentally.
■ Turn off layers. Use this option rather than freezing if you frequently need to switch a layer’s
visibility.
■ Freeze layers. Use this option if you don’t need a layer to be visible for a long time. Thawing a
frozen layer causes an automatic regeneration of the drawing and is slower than turning a layer
on.
■ Lock layers. Use this option to prevent objects on a layer from being modified. You can still use
the objects on a locked layer for operations that don’t modify the objects. For example, you can
snap to these objects to use them as guides for precision drawing.
56 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup
Tutorial: Tour a Drawing
In this tutorial, you tour a drawing of an arbor and picket fence design.
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT installation folder
and open arbor.dwg.
3 Click the Model tab.
4 As you move the mouse over the objects in the drawing, notice that the objects are automatically
highlighted.
5 Zoom and pan in model space to inspect the arbor design.
6 Perform a Zoom Extents to display the entire design.
7 Click the ANSI C Layout tab.
8 Zoom and pan in paper space to inspect the drawing layout.
9 Perform a Zoom Extents to display the entire layout.
10 Click Format menu ➤ Layer. In the Layer Properties Manager, review the list of layers that were
created to organize this drawing.
Notice that the current layer has a green check next to it.
11 Click several lightbulb icons to turn off several layers.
12 Click the column labeled On to arrange the layers according to whether they are on or off. Then
turn the layers back on.
13 Click the Color column to arrange the layers according to color.
14 Click the Name column and click OK.
15 Close the drawing without saving it.
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Start a new drawing File ➤ New Standard
Save a drawing template File ➤ Save As Standard
Set the display style of the units Format ➤ Units
Create a layout File ➤ Page Setup
Create and modify layers Format ➤ Layer Layers
Tutorial: Tour a Drawing | 57
Help system
NEW, SAVEAS, STARTUP, UNITS, MODEL, LAYOUT, LAYER
Review and Recall
1 Why is it important to start a drawing from a drawing template file?
2 What is the difference between choosing drawing units and setting the drawing unit format?
3 What is the difference between the Model tab and a layout tab?
4 What are several benefits to creating a drawing with layers?
Create rectangles easily
Use lines for drawing objects
and for construction geometry
Use circles and arcs to
create regular curves
Offset lines to create parallel lines
Use polylines to combine
line and arc segments
Use splines to create smooth,
non-uniform curves
Draw Objects
Object Properties Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Assign Object Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Use the Properties Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Use the Properties and Layers Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tutorial: Change Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Use Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Scale Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Assign Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Create Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Draw Polylines and Polygons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Draw Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Draw Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Draw Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Draw Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
60 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects
Object Properties Overview
All objects created in AutoCAD LT have properties. Object properties are settings that control the
appearance and geometric characteristics of an object. The general properties that are common to
all objects are listed below. All other object properties are specific to the type of object.
Assign Object Properties
Typically, you assign object properties using one of the following strategies:
■ By layer. Properties are assigned to a layer. Objects that are drawn on that layer automatically use
those properties.
■ Individual properties. Properties are assigned to objects individually, regardless of the layer that
they are drawn on.
Color Linetype scale Hyperlink
Layer Plot style Lineweight
Linetype Thickness
View a description of the selected property.
Click the icon to expand or collapse a
category of properties.
Click to change a property.
Right-click to set palette behavior options.
Object Properties Overview | 61
Use the Properties Palette
The Properties palette is the primary tool for viewing, setting, and modifying the properties of
objects. The Properties palette operates as follows:
■ If no objects are selected, the Properties palette displays the current default property settings, and
you can set the default properties for all subsequently created objects.
■ When you click an object, the Properties palette displays the properties of that object, and you
can change its properties.
■ If you click multiple objects, the Properties palette displays all the properties that they have in
common, and you can change their common properties.
Try it: Display the Properties palette
1 Click File menu ➤ New.
2 In the Select Template dialog box, click one of the drawing template files and then click Open.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties.
Leaving the palette open keeps it handy. You can turn on Auto-hide to make the Properties palette
appear and disappear when your cursor moves over the Properties palette title bar.
Try it: Change the Auto-hide behavior of the Properties palette
1 Right-click the Properties palette title bar. Click Auto-hide on the shortcut menu.
2 Move the cursor on and off the Properties palette. Leave the Properties palette open.
Use the Properties and Layers Toolbars
You can use the controls in the Properties toolbar and the Layers toolbar to view, set, and modify the
properties the same way as the Properties palette. By default, these toolbars are displayed above the
drawing area.
The Properties toolbar provides convenient access to the most important object properties.
The Layers toolbar controls layer properties. Use the Layer Properties Manager button to make
adjustments to drawing layers. The Layer control provides a quick method for changing several layer
properties and for changing the current layer.
Color control Linetype control Lineweight
control
Plotstyle
control
Properties
toolbar
62 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects
Tutorial: Change Object Properties
In this tutorial, you will use several controls to view and change the properties of layers and objects.
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT installation folder
and open arbor.dwg.
3 Click the Model tab.
4 Move your cursor onto the title bar of the Properties palette.
Examine the current default properties settings.
5 Click a dimension object in the drawing to select it.
Notice that several properties of this object are displayed in the Properties toolbar near the top
of the application window. The layer of the object is Dimension. The color, linetype, and
lineweight properties of the object are set to ByLayer. The color of the Dimension layer is red.
6 Move your cursor onto the title bar of the Properties palette to open it.
Examine the additional properties of the dimension object in the Properties palette.
7 Click several more objects with different colors. Move your cursor onto the title bar of the
Properties palette.
Notice that only the common properties of the objects are listed.
8 Move your cursor off the Properties palette and press ESC to cancel the selection.
Change the default color of a layer
1 Click Format menu ➤ Layer.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the red box under the Color column of the Dimension
layer.
3 In the select Color dialog box, click the green box and click OK. Click OK again to exit the Layer
Properties Manager.
Notice that all the objects on the Dimension layer are now green. Because all of the dimensions
are on a single layer, you can change the properties of all objects on that layer in one operation.
Change the color of an individual object
1 Click any green dimension object to select it.
2 On the Properties toolbar, click the Color control and click Magenta.
Layer
control
make the layer of the currently
selected object the current layer.
Layer Properties
Manager
make the previous layer
the current layer. Layers
toolbar
Object Properties Overview | 63
The color of the selected object changes to magenta, overriding the green color of the object’s
layer. If you change the layer color, the dimension object’s color will remain magenta.
3 Press ESC to exit.
4 Click the same dimension object.
5 Click the Color control and click ByLayer. This restores the color property behavior of the
dimension object.
Change the current layer
1 Click the Layer control on the Layers toolbar.
2 Click a different layer to make it the current layer.
All new objects will be created on this layer until you change the current layer to a different one.
3 Click Format menu ➤ Layer
4 In the Layer Properties Manager, click a layer to select it.
5 Click the green check mark button at the top of the Layer Properties Manager. Click OK to make
the selected layer the current layer.
6 Click the Layer control on the Layers toolbar.
7 Click the lightbulb image for the Dimension layer to turn it off. Then click anywhere in the
drawing area.
All objects on the Dimension layer are now hidden.
8 Use the Layer Properties Manager to turn the Dimension layer back on.
9 Close the drawing without saving it.
Use Linetypes
You can associate a single linetype with all of the AutoCAD LT objects drawn on the same layer or
you can assign linetypes individually to objects. You can use any of the standard linetypes that
AutoCAD LT provides, or you can create your own linetypes.
Color control
Properties
toolbar
Layer control
Layers
toolbar
64 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects
To use a linetype, you must first load it into your drawing using the Linetype Manager.
Try it: Load a linetype and make it current
1 Click File menu ➤ New and select a drawing template.
2 Click Format menu ➤ Linetype.
3 In the Linetype Manager, click Load.
4 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, scroll down the list of linetypes and click
HIDDENX2. Click OK.
5 Click Show Details.
Several linetype scaling options are displayed. Notice the Use Paper Space Units for Scaling
option. You check this option if you want linetypes automatically scaled in layout viewports.
6 Click the HIDDENX2 linetype and click Current. Click OK.
Notice that the Properties toolbar near the top of the application window displays the
HIDDENX2 linetype as current rather than BYLAYER. All subsequently created objects will be
displayed using this linetype. This setting overrides the linetype assigned to the current layer.
7 Click the Model tab.
CONTINUOUS
HIDDEN
CENTER
PHANTOM
Object Properties Overview | 65
8 Click Draw menu ➤ Line and click several locations in the drawing area to draw line segments.
Press ENTER to end the command.
9 Use the Linetype Manager or the Properties toolbar to return the current linetype to BYLAYER.
All subsequently created objects will be displayed using the linetype assigned to the current layer.
Scale Linetypes
When you scale views in layout viewports, you can create inconsistencies in the appearance of
linetypes. In noncontinuous linetypes, the length of dashes and dots, and the space between them,
may increase or decrease. You can set the scaling to correspond to the model or layout scale or to
remain the same at any zoom scale.
Use the Details area of the Linetype Manager to control the linetype scale in layout viewports.
■ Global Scale Factor. Sets the global scale factor for all linetypes.
■ Current Object Scale. Sets the linetype scale for newly created objects.
■ Use Paper Space Units for Scaling. Scales the linetypes in paper space and model space identically.
To update a linetype scale, you need to regenerate the model space display within a layout viewport
on the layout tab. The steps required are
1 Click a layout tab.
2 Double-click within a layout viewport to enter model space.
3 Click View menu ➤ Regen.
The linetypes within the layout viewport are scaled according to the viewport display scale setting.
Dashed linetype
scaled to the model
Dashed linetype
scaled to the layout
66 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects
Assign Lineweights
Using lineweights, you can create heavy and thin lines to show cuts in sections, depth in elevations,
dimension lines and tick marks, and differences in details. Lineweights are independent of the
current display scale. Objects with a heavier lineweight always appear at the specified line width
regardless of display scale.
Try it: Choose a lineweight and make it current
1 Click the Model tab.
2 Click Format menu ➤ Lineweight.
3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, under Lineweights, click a heavier lineweight such as 0.50
mm or 0.020”.
4 Click Display Lineweight and click OK.
Notice that the Properties toolbar near the top of the application window displays the new
lineweight as current. From now on, objects that are created will be displayed using the heavier
lineweight.
5 Click Draw menu ➤ Line and draw several line segments. Press ENTER.
6 Use the Lineweight Settings dialog box or the Properties toolbar to return the current linetype to
BYLAYER.
From now on, objects that are created will be displayed using the lineweight assigned to the
current layer.
7 Practice setting linetypes and lineweights.
NOTE You can assign a color, linetype, or lineweight to individual objects, regardless of the default
layer setting. Whether you choose to assign these properties individually or by layer settings depends on
your drawing organization and company standards.
Draw Lines | 67
Draw Lines
The line is the most basic object in AutoCAD LT. A line can be one segment or a series of successive
segments, but each segment is a separate line object. If you need to draw a series of line segments as
a single object, such as in a contour map, use a polyline.
Create Parallel Lines
An offset line is an exact replica of a line that is drawn at a specified distance from the original line.
You can use the OFFSET command to create parallel lines as well as concentric circles and parallel
curves.
Offsetting objects is one of the most efficient construction methods used in AutoCAD LT.
Try it: Offset a line to create parallel lines
1 Draw a line.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Offset.
3 At the offset distance prompt, enter 10.
4 Click the line to offset.
5 Click on one side of the line.
6 Press ENTER to end the command.
Draw Polylines and Polygons
A polyline is a connected sequence of line or arc segments created as a single object. Use polylines for
creating objects such as
■ Traces on printed circuit boards
■ Borders
■ Contour lines, roads, and rivers in maps
■ Segments with fixed or tapered widths
Polygons are closed polylines with equal-length sides and angles. The Polygon command is the
simplest method for creating equilateral triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, and so on.
offset arcs
offset lines
68 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects
Draw Polylines
To draw each polyline segment, you specify a start point and an endpoint. To draw additional
segments, continue to specify points in your drawing.
Try it: Create a polyline
1 Click Draw menu ➤ Polyline.
2 At each prompt, click a point. After several points, do one of the following:
■ Press ENTER to end the command.
■ Enter c to create a closed loop.
3 Click the polyline. Notice that the segments all belong to a single object.
You can include arc segments in polylines.
Try it: Create a polyline with arc segments
1 Click Draw menu ➤ Polyline.
2 Draw a polyline segment (1 and 2).
3 At the next prompt, enter a to switch to Arc mode and continue with an arc segment (3).
4 Enter L to return to Line mode, and then draw another line segment.
5 End the command.
Try it: Create a rectangle
1 Click Draw menu ➤ Rectangle.
2 Click a location on the screen.
3 Move the cursor diagonally and click another location.
The resulting object is a closed polyline in the shape of a rectangle.
Endpoint of arc Final segment
3
2
1
Draw Lines | 69
Try it: Create a polygon
1 Click Draw menu ➤ Polygon.
2 Enter the number of sides, for example, 6.
3 Click a location for the center of the polygon.
4 Specify either the Inscribed or the Circumscribed option. This determines how the distance that
you enter in the next prompt is measured.
5 To specify a “radius” of the polygon, do one of the following:
■ Move the cursor and click a location.
■ Enter a distance.
The resulting object is also a closed polyline.
You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options after you specify
a starting point for a polyline. You can also make polyline segments taper.
Once you create a polyline, you can
■ Separate the polyline into independent segments with the EXPLODE command.
■ Join a polyine to another polyline, line or arc with the JOIN command.
inscribed radius circumscribed radius
Mixed width Uniform width Tapered segment
70 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects
Draw Circles and Arcs
You can create a variety of basic curved objects with AutoCAD LT, including circles and arcs.
Draw Circles
To create circles, use one of the following methods:
■ Specify the center and radius (default method).
■ Specify the center and diameter.
■ Define the circumference of the circle with two or three points.
■ Create the circle tangent to two existing objects.
■ Create the circle tangent to two objects and specify a radius.
Draw Arcs
To create arcs, you can specify various combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle,
chord length, and direction values. The following examples illustrate three ways to specify two
points and an included angle.
radius
1 1
3
2
center
2
radius
tangent objects
Center, radius Two points
defining diameter
Three points defining
circumference
Tangent, tangent,
radius
Start, center, angle
1
2
Center, start, angle
1
2
Start, end, angle
1
2
included angle
Draw Circles and Arcs | 71
NOTE The FILLET command creates an arc tangent to two existing objects. This is often the preferred
method for creating arcs and will be covered later.
Help system
PROPERTIES, COLOR, LAYER, LINETYPE, LTSCALE, CELTSCALE, PSLTSCALE, LINEWEIGHT, LINE, OFFSET,
PLINE, POLYGON, RECTANG, PEDIT, JOIN, EXPLODE, CIRCLE, ARC
Review and Recall
1 What is the result of setting the color of an object to ByLayer?
2 What is the fastest way to change the current layer to a different one?
3 What would you do to access a complete list of the properties of an object?
4 What command is recommended for creating parallel lines and curves?
5 What type of object is composed of a series of connected segments?
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Set properties Tools ➤ Properties
Modify ➤ Properties
Standard
Load, scale, and
manage linetypes
Format ➤ Linetype Properties
Change lineweight
settings
Format ➤ Lineweight Properties
Draw lines Draw ➤ Line Draw
Draw parallel lines Modify ➤ Offset Modify
Draw polylines Draw ➤ Polyline Draw
Draw polygons Draw ➤ Polygon Draw
Separate polyline
segments
Modify ➤ Explode Modify
Join polylines Modify ➤ Join Modify
Draw circles Draw ➤ Circle Draw
Draw arcs Draw ➤ Arc Draw
Enter coordinate values to
locate points precisely
Turn on polar tracking to draw
along specified angles
Turn on Ortho to draw
horizontal and vertical
lines
Turn on Grid and Snap to
draw within a predefined
framework
Use object snaps
to locate precise
points on objects
Precision Drawing
Set Grid and Snap Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Set Grid and Snap Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Set Grid Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Draw with Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Use Cartesian and Polar Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Draw with Absolute Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Draw with Relative Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Snap to Precise Points on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Use Single Object Snaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Set Running Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Object Snap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Specify Angles and Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Use Polar Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specify Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specify an Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tutorial: Draw with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
74 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing
Set Grid and Snap Values
The grid and snap features set up a framework that you can use as a guide while drawing.
■ Grid displays a rectangular pattern of dots that extends over the area specified by the drawing grid
limits. The grid helps you align objects and visualize the distances between them. The grid does
not appear in the plotted drawing.
■ Snap restricts the movement of the crosshairs to intervals that you have defined. When Snap is
on, the cursor seems to adhere, or “snap,” to an invisible grid. Snap is useful for specifying precise
points with the cursor.
Set Grid and Snap Spacing
The grid does not necessarily correspond to the current snap interval. You might set a wide grid
spacing to be used as a reference but maintain a closer snap spacing for accuracy in specifying points.
For example, you might set the grid spacing to 10 times the snap spacing in a metric drawing or 12
times the snap spacing in an imperial drawing.
Try it: Constrain the cursor with Snap
1 Start a new drawing.
2 Click the Snap button on the status bar.
Notice that the button changes to indicate that Snap has been turned on.
3 Move the pointer around in the drawing area while Snap is turned on.
Notice that the cursor seems to adhere, or “snap,” to points at equal intervals in the drawing area.
Try it: Display a grid
1 Click the Grid button on the status bar.
Notice that the grid dots cover a limited area, the grid limits.
2 Turn Grid and Snap off.
If you zoom in or out, you might need to adjust grid spacing to be more appropriate for the new
magnification.
Set Grid and Snap Values | 75
Try it: Change the Grid and Snap spacing
1 Right-click either the Grid or Snap button on the status bar.
2 Click Settings on the shortcut menu.
3 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, specify new spacings for Grid and Snap. Click OK.
4 Turn on Grid and Snap.
Set Grid Limits
Try it: Change the grid limits
1 Click Format menu ➤ Drawing Limits.
2 Click two points to represent the lower-left and the upper-right corners of a rectangular area.
3 Repeat using two different points.
Grid limits shown by
range of grid dots
76 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing
Draw with Coordinates
Coordinates represent locations in your drawing. When a command prompts you for a point, you
can use the cursor to specify a point in the drawing area or you can enter coordinate values.
Use Cartesian and Polar Coordinates
In two-dimensional space, you specify points on a plane that is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper.
You can enter two-dimensional coordinates as either Cartesian (X,Y) or polar (distance<angle)
coordinates.
■ Cartesian coordinates are measured from two perpendicular lines, the X axis and the Y axis. The
X value specifies horizontal distance, and the Y value specifies vertical distance. For example, the
coordinates 5,3 represent a point 5 units along the X axis and 3 units along the Y axis. The origin
(0,0) indicates where the two axes intersect.
■ Polar coordinates use a distance and an angle to locate a point. For example, the coordinates
5<30 specifies a point that is a distance of 5 units from the origin and at a 30 degree angle from
the X axis.
You can use absolute or relative values with each method. Absolute coordinate values are based on
the origin. Relative coordinate values are based on the last point entered.
Draw with Absolute Cartesian Coordinates
Use absolute Cartesian coordinates when you know the precise X and Y values of the location of the
point. For example, the line in the illustration begins at an X value of –2 and a Y value of 1 and ends
at 3,4. The entries on the command line were as follows:
Command: line
Specify first point: #–2,1
Specify next point or [Undo]: #3,4
Y
X –X
-Y
0,0 -2,1
3,4
Draw with Coordinates | 77
Entering the # identifies the coordinates as absolute coordinates.
Draw with Relative Cartesian Coordinates
Use relative Cartesian coordinates when you know the location of a point in relation to the previous
point. For example, to locate a point relative to the absolute coordinates –2,1, start the next
coordinates with the @ symbol.
Command: line
Specify first point: #–2,1
Specify next point or [Undo]: @5,3
Entering @5,3 locates the same point in this example as entering #3,4 in the previous example.
NOTE Absolute coordinates are entered differently if dynamic input (the DYN button on the status bar)
is turned off. In that case, the # is not used to specify absolute coordinates.
78 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing
Snap to Precise Points on Objects
Using object snaps is the most important way to specify an exact location on an object without
having to use coordinates. For example, you can use an object snap to draw a line to the exact center
of a circle, to the endpoint of another line segment, or to the tangent on an arc.
You can specify an object snap whenever AutoCAD LT prompts for a point. When you move your
cursor over an object, AutoCAD LT identifies an active object snap point with AutoSnap markers and
tooltips.
Use Single Object Snaps
When AutoCAD LT prompts you for a point, you can specify a single object snap by holding down
SHIFT, right-clicking, and choosing an object snap from the Object Snap menu.
Once you have specified an object snap, use the cursor to select a location on an object.
NOTE To cycle through all the object snap points available for a particular object, press TAB.
Press SHIFT and right-click to
display the object snap menu
object snaps
Snap to Precise Points on Objects | 79
Set Running Object Snaps
To use the same object snap repeatedly, set it as a running object snap. It will stay active until you
turn it off. For example, you might set Center as a running snap if you need to connect the centers
of a series of circles with a line.
You can set multiple running object snaps, such as Endpoint and Center.
Try it: Change the running object snap settings
1 Right-click Osnap on the status bar.
2 On the shortcut menu, click Settings.
3 On the Drafting Settings dialog box, select the object snaps you want to use. Click OK.
80 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing
Object Snap Descriptions
The following table illustrates commonly used object snaps.
Object snap Snaps to
Endpoint Object endpoints
Midpoint Object midpoints
Intersection
Object intersections or, for single object snaps,
locations where intersections would occur if
objects were extended
Center
Center points of circles, arcs, or ellipses
Quadrant
Quadrants of arcs, circles, or ellipses
Perpendicular
Points on objects that form a perpendicular
alignment with the last point specified
Tangent
Point on a circle or arc that, when connected to
the last point, forms a line tangent to the object
Specify Angles and Distances | 81
Specify Angles and Distances
You can quickly specify angles and distances using the polar tracking, direct-distance entry, and
angle override features.
Use Polar Tracking
As you draw lines or move objects, you can use polar tracking to restrict the movement of the cursor
to specified angle increments (the default value is 90 degrees). For example, you can create a series
of perpendicular lines by turning on Polar before you start drawing. Because the lines are constrained
to the horizontal and vertical axes, you can draw faster, knowing that the lines are perpendicular.
Try it: Use polar tracking
1 Click Polar on the status bar to turn it on.
2 Draw several lines at 90 degrees from each other.
Specify Distances
Use direct distance entry to specify an exact line length quickly—by moving the cursor to indicate a
direction and then entering the distance from the first point. When polar tracking is on, using direct
distance entry helps you draw perpendicular lines of a specified length efficiently.
Polar tracking restricts cursor
movement to specified angles
alignment path
tooltip display of distance and angle
Polar: 1.5<45
Polar tracking constrains the cursor
to an angle, in this case 180 degrees...
then direct distance entry determines
the exact length of the line, in this
case, 1000
82 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing
Try it: Draw several lines of specified lengths
1 Click Draw menu ➤ Line.
2 Click a point and then move the cursor to the right (0 degrees).
3 Enter a value.
4 Move the cursor up (90 degrees) and enter another value.
5 Repeat several more times and then press ENTER.
Specify an Angle
If the angle that you want to use is not going to be used frequently, you can enter an angle override.
For example, if you start drawing a line at the coordinates –2,1, and want that line to be at a 10
degree angle with a length of 50, you would enter
Command: line
Specify first point: #–2,1
Specify next point or [Undo]: <10
(Move the cursor in the desired direction)
Specify next point or [Undo]: 50
Tutorial: Draw with Precision
In this tutorial, you will practice using some of the precision tools available in AutoCAD LT to create
the following drawing, which can be the beginning of a design for
■ A health spa with exercise pool
■ A catch for a window lock
■ A housing for a motor assembly
NOTE It is important that you save this drawing as you work. It will be used in several future tutorials
in this guide.
Specify Angles and Distances | 83
1 Click File menu ➤ New.
2 Select the tutorial drawing template file that is closest to your intended application and units of
measurement:
■ Tutorial-mArch.dwt. Sample architectural template (metric)
■ Tutorial-mMfg.dwt. Sample mechanical design template (metric)
■ Tutorial-iArch.dwt. Sample architectural template (imperial)
■ Tutorial-iMfg.dwt. Sample mechanical design template (imperial)
3 Click the Model tab.
4 Click File menu ➤ Save. Use MyDesign as the file name.
Use Grid and Snap to create an outline
1 On the status bar, turn on Grid and Snap. Dynamic Input (Dyn) should also be turned on.
2 Click Draw menu ➤ Line and click several locations to create a series of line segments to create
the previously illustrated design. The exact dimensions don’t matter, but use reasonable
distances for the design. Press ENTER to end the command.
3 Click Draw menu ➤ Circle ➤ Center, Radius.
4 Click a point to locate the center of the circle, and then click another point to specify its radius.
5 Turn Grid and Snap off.
Create a line using object snaps
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase.
The crosshairs cursor changes into a square pickbox cursor.
2 Click directly on one of the lines that you created and then press ENTER.
The line is erased, but how do you create another line to take its place with precision?
3 Click Draw menu ➤ Line.
4 Press SHIFT and right-click. From the object snap menu, click Endpoint.
5 Move the cursor over an endpoint of a line. When you see an AutoSnap marker, click.
6 Press SHIFT and right-click again. From the object snap menu, click Endpoint.
7 Move the cursor over the opposite endpoint and click. Press ENTER to end the command.
The endpoints of the new line are located exactly at the endpoints of the adjacent lines.
84 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing
8 Do the following:
■ Experiment with creating lines using the following object snaps: Midpoint, Center,
Perpendicular, and Tangent.
■ Turn running object snaps on and create several more lines.
■ Create a line from the center of the circle at a 30 degree angle and 10 units long.
9 Erase any objects that are not part of the illustrated result.
10 Save the drawing. MyDesign should be the file name.
Help system
GRID, SNAP, DSETTINGS, LIMITS, UCS, DYNMODE, OSNAP, OPTIONS
Review and Recall
1 How do you turn off the grid dots in your drawing area?
2 The term origin refers to what coordinate values?
3 Pressing SHIFT while you right-click displays what shortcut menu?
4 What button can you turn on to ensure that the line you are drawing is exactly vertical?
5 What is meant by the term direct distance entry?
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Set Snap and Grid spacing Tools ➤ Drafting Settings,
Snap and Grid tab
Use single object snaps SHIFT+right-click for the
object snap menu
Object Snap
Set running object snaps Tools ➤ Drafting Settings,
Object Snap tab
Object Snap
Change AutoSnap settings Tools ➤ Options, Drafting
tab
Change polar settings Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Polar Tracking
Use COPY to create duplicates
at locations that you specify
Use MIRROR to create an exact replica
of objects across a mirror line
Use DIST to measure the distance
between two points
Use FILLET to connect
two lines with an arc
Use OFFSET to create parallel
lines and concentric circles
Use TRIM to remove the parts of
objects that extend beyond cutting
edges that you specify
Make Modifications
Select Objects to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Object Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Specify a Selection Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Erase, Extend, and Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Erase Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Extend Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Duplicate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Copy Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Offset Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Mirror Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Move and Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Move Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fillet Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tutorial: Modify Objects with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Tutorial: Create a New Drawing with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Match Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Use Editing Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Edit with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Create Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Analyze Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
88 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Select Objects to Edit
When you edit objects, you select one or more objects to specify a selection set of the objects. You can
use two methods to specify which objects to modify:
■ Choose the command first. Choose an editing command and then select objects to modify.
■ Choose the objects first. Select objects and then start the editing command. In addition, when
you use this method, grips are displayed on the objects that you can use to modify the objects
directly. You can clear a selection by pressing ESC.
Object Selection Methods
The two most common methods to select objects are
■ Select individual objects. Click objects individually.
■ Specify a selection area. Click a rectangular area around the objects to be selected.
Specify a Selection Area
You can select objects by enclosing them in a rectangular selection area. You define a rectangular
selection area in the drawing area by clicking opposite corners. The order in which you specify the
corners makes a difference.
■ Drag from left to right to create a window selection, which selects only objects entirely within the
selection area.
■ Drag from right to left to create a crossing selection, which selects objects within and crossing the
selection area.
NOTE You can remove objects from the selection set by pressing SHIFT and then clicking them.
Objects selected using window selection
1
2
Erase, Extend, and Trim Objects | 89
Erase, Extend, and Trim Objects
These methods delete objects or change their lengths:
■ Erase deletes the entire object.
■ Extend lengthens an object to a precise boundary.
■ Trim shortens an object to a precise boundary and removes the excess.
Erase Objects
You can use all the object selection methods with the ERASE command. The example shows how
you use window selection to erase a section of piping.
Try it: Practice using window and crossing selection
1 Start a new drawing.
2 Create some lines, arcs, and circles.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase.
4 Select several objects using a crossing selection and press ENTER.
Notice which objects are selected and erased.
5 Select several more objects using a window selection and press ENTER.
Again, notice which objects are selected and erased.
6 Select the other objects that you created in step 1 individually and press ENTER to erase them.
1
2
Result Selected objects Objects selected with
window selection
90 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Extend Objects
You can extend objects so that they end precisely at a boundary defined by other objects. If you press
ENTER instead of selecting boundary objects, all visible objects in the drawing become potential
boundaries. The illustration shows lines extended precisely to the circle, which is the nearest
boundary.
Try it: Extend an object
1 Create a short line. Then create circle that encompasses the line.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Extend.
3 At the Select Objects prompt, click the circle.
Notice that you select the boundary objects first.
4 Press ENTER to end boundary selection.
This step is easy to forget.
5 At the next Select Objects prompt, click one end of the line and then the other end of the line.
Press ENTER to end the command.
Trim Objects
Trimming objects is very similar to extending them. To trim, you cut an object at an edge defined
by one or more objects. By default, objects defined as cutting edges must intersect the object to be
trimmed.
Select objects to extend nearest
to the end to be extended
Press ENTER to accept
all objects as boundaries
Result
Cutting edges selected
with a crossing selection
Object to trim selected Result
1
2
3
Erase, Extend, and Trim Objects | 91
Try it: Trim an object
1 Create two horizontal lines and two vertical lines as shown in the left side of the previous
illustration.
You can use the Perpendicular object snap to make sure that the two horizontal lines intersect
the vertical line.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Trim.
3 At the Select Objects prompt, click points 1 and 2 as previously illustrated.
Notice that you select the boundary objects first.
4 Press ENTER to end boundary selection.
5 At the next Select Objects prompt, click the vertical line at point 3 as shown. Press ENTER to end
the command.
NOTE With both EXTEND and TRIM, you must accept the selection set of boundary objects by pressing
ENTER, and then select the objects to be trimmed. If you press ENTER without selecting any boundary
objects, all objects become potential boundaries.
92 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Duplicate Objects
There are several ways to make copies of objects:
■ Copy creates new objects at a specified location.
■ Offset creates new objects at a specified distance from selected objects or through a specified
point.
■ Mirror creates a mirror image of objects around a specified mirror line.
Copy Objects
To copy an object, you select one or more objects to copy, specify a start point, called a base point,
and then specify a second point to determine the distance and direction of the copy. The two points
can be anywhere within the drawing. For example, in the following illustration, the circle is copied
from one rectangle to a corresponding location on the second rectangle.
Try it: Copy an object
1 Create two rectangles and a circle as shown on the left side of the previous illustration.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Copy.
3 At the Select Objects prompt, click the circle and press ENTER.
4 At the Specify Base Point prompt, press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu.
Click Endpoint.
5 Click the corner of the rectangle at point 2 as shown.
Result 1 Select the circle
2 Specify a base point (endpoint object snap)
3 Specify second point (endpoint object snap)
Duplicate Objects | 93
6 At the Specify Second Point prompt, press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu.
Click Endpoint.
7 Click the corner of the other rectangle at point 3 as shown.
8 Press ENTER to end the command.
The copied circle is at the same location relative to its enclosing rectangle as the original circle.
You can also copy objects specifying a base point followed by direct distance entry, typically with
polar snap turned on.
The Copy command automatically repeats so you can easily create multiple copies.
Offset Objects
Offsetting creates a new object that seems to trace a selected object at a specified distance. Offsetting
circles creates larger or smaller circles depending on the offset side. For an easy way to create parallel
lines or concentric circles, use offsetting.
Objects selected Base point specified
and a distance entered
Result
enter a distance
Object selected(bush) Result
base point
next point
next point
next point
second point
94 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
NOTE Offsetting several objects followed by trimming or extending them is a very efficient drawing
technique.
Mirror Objects
You mirror objects around a mirror line, which you define with two points. You then choose to
delete or retain the original objects.
Mirroring is useful for creating symmetrical objects. You can draw half the object and quickly mirror
it rather than draw the whole object.
object offset
original object
1
2
3
mirror
line
Objects selected Mirror line defined Result with original retained
4
Move and Rotate Objects | 95
Move and Rotate Objects
An important drawing technique is to create one or more objects and then move or rotate them into
place.
Move Objects
You move objects the same way that you copy them. You select the object to move, specify the base
point (1), and then specify a second point to determine the distance and direction of the move (2).
In the illustration, these steps move the window higher and away from the door.
Rotate Objects
You rotate objects by specifying a base point and a rotation angle. You can specify the rotation angle
by specifying a point or entering a value for the angle.
In the following example, you specify the base point (1) and a second point (2) that determines the
angle of rotation (2) for the orientation of a house.
Instead of specifying the second point in the example, you could have entered -35 to specify the
rotation in degrees. Repeating the rotation with the same base point and angle would result in the
house being rotated a total of 70 degrees from its original orientation.
NOTE By default, a positive angle results in a counter-clockwise rotation. However, this setting can be
changed using the UNITS command.
1 2
Select objects, specify base point and
new location of the selected objects.
Objects selected Result
1
Base point and
angle of rotation
2
96 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Fillet Corners
Filleting connects two objects with an arc of a specified radius that is tangent to the objects.
Use the Radius option of the Fillet command to specify arc radius of the fillet. Changing the radius
sets the default radius for subsequent fillets. By default, the filleted objects are trimmed as shown in
the illustration.
One useful technique is to set the fillet radius to 0. This results in two objects intersecting in a sharp
corner as illustrated. No arc is created.
NOTE You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a
value of 0.
You can also fillet circles, arcs, and polylines. Depending on the points you specify, more than one
possible fillet can exist between circles and arcs. AutoCAD LT chooses the endpoint closest to your
selection point.
Objects selected Result
Radius set to 0,
objects selected
Result
Fillet Corners | 97
Tutorial: Modify Objects with Precision
In the following tutorial, you will use precision drawing techniques to modify part of an assessor’s
map.
The adjoining property owners of an empty city lot persuaded their city council to allow them to
acquire the lot. The only requirement was that the property owners agree on an equitable division.
How would you divide the empty lot?
The proposal accepted by the property owners expanded lots 26 and 27 to make their total lot sizes
equal. The fence between lots 38 and 39 was extended. Lot 38 was larger than the others, but this
benefit was offset by its irregular shape.
empty lot
98 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Use the following procedure to change the boundaries of the lots.
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT product folder and
open map.dwg.
3 To simplify the display, turn off the Text layer.
You first create a new property line on the left side of the triangular lot. The top end of the new
property line will be displaced 15.73 feet; and the bottom end of the new property will be
displaced by 39.94 feet. These distances were determined using trial-and-error to make lots 26
and 27 about equal in area, but without making lot 38 too narrow or too large.
To accomplish this task, you create some “construction geometry” that makes the task easier.
4 Use the Circle command and object snaps to create a circle with a radius of 15.73 and a circle
with a radius of 39.94 centered on the intersections as shown in the illustration.
Fillet Corners | 99
5 Use intersection object snaps to create a new property line as shown in the illustration.
6 Erase the old property line and the two construction circles.
100 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Next, extend the old property line to the new one.
7 Click Modify menu ➤ Extend.
8 Click the new property line. This line is the boundary for extending the old property line.
9 Press ENTER. This action is important and easily forgotten. It separates the objects that serve as
boundaries from the objects to be extended.
10 Click the old property line near the end to be extended as shown.
Fillet Corners | 101
11 Press ENTER to end the command.
12 Use the same method to extend the other property line to the lower border.
13 Erase the old property lines to open the long, narrow lot.
102 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
14 Draw a short property line using the endpoint object snap between the end points of the
property lines as shown.
The new property lines are complete. But how can you find the new areas of the lots?
Find the areas of the lots
1 On the command line, enter boundary.
2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, click Pick Points. Then click inside each of the lots. Press
ENTER to end the command.
A closed polyline object is created using the property lines for each lot. These closed polylines
are superimposed upon the existing property lines and can later be erased.
Fillet Corners | 103
Note As you move your cursor over the map, different polylines highlight. Where the polylines share
a common boundary, only one of them is highlighted. To avoid these common boundaries, move your
cursor around the outer edges of the map. Alternatively, you can press CTRL and click a shared
boundary repeatedly to cycle through all objects at that location.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties.
4 Click one of the boundaries and find the area listed in the Properties palette.
5 Press ESC to clear the selection.
6 Find the area of each of the other lots.
7 Close the map drawing without saving it.
Tutorial: Create a New Drawing with Precision
In the following tutorial, you will create a detail drawing of a type of jet engine mount used to attach
jet engines to commercial aircraft. You will be happy to know that this part is made of a high-
strength, nickel-chromium-iron alloy.
NOTE Each step in this tutorial is not specified in detail. When in doubt, feel free to review earlier
portions in this guide or use the Help system. You can access all the commands in this tutorial using the
Draw and Modify menus.
104 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
1 Start a new drawing using the drawing template file, Tutorial-mMfg.dwt.
This template is for mechanical design drawings using metric units. All distances are assumed to
be in millimeters.
2 Click the Model tab.
3 Make sure that the Polar and Osnap buttons on the status bar are turned on. The current layer
should be Model-Front.
Create the front view
1 Create a circle with a diameter (not radius) of 50 mm at the coordinates 180,100.
Note The precise location of this circle is not critical in this tutorial, but it’s a good idea to make sure
that several significant features coincide with snap locations. For single-view drawings or 3D models,
it’s a good idea to have a significant feature located at the origin (0,0). This is convenient when
referencing a drawing from another drawing such as with assembly drawings.
2 Use the Center object snap to draw a circle with a diameter of 24 using the center point of the
previous circle.
The Center object snap may not be a default running object snap. Press SHIFT and right-click to
access the object snap menu.
3 Using PolarSnap to lock the angle at 0 degrees, copy the two circles to a location 125 mm to the
right.
Command: copy
Select objects: Select the two circles and press ENTER
Specify base point or [Displacement]: Click the center of the circles and move your cursor to the right
Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>: 125
Specify second point or [Exit/Undo]: Press ENTER
4 Offset the inner circle on left by 4 mm to the outside.
Command: offset
Specify offset distance or [Through/Erase/Layer]: 4
Select object to offset or [Exit/Undo]: Select the left inner circle
Specify point on side to offset or [Exit/Multiple/Undo]: Click anywhere outside the circles
Fillet Corners | 105
5 Create a circle using the tangent-tangent-radius (Ttr) option. The radius should be 250 mm.
Notice that the AutoSnap marker for tangent is turned on automatically.
Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: t
Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select an outer circle near the expected tangent location
Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select the other outer circle as shown
Specify radius of circle: 250 (only part of the circle is shown in the illustration)
6 Trim the large circle as shown below.
106 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
7 Use the Mirror command to mirror the arc using the center points of the left and right circles to
define the mirror line. Again, use SHIFT and right-click to access the object snap menu.
There are often alternative methods for each step. For example, to create the lower arc, you could
have used the Fillet command to fillet the two outer circles with a radius of 250 mm.
8 Trim the outer-left circle as shown.
The front view of the part is complete. Next, you will use the objects in the front view to create the
top view of the part.
Create the top view
1 Set the current layer to Model-Top. You can use the Layer control on the Layers toolbar, or the
Layer Properties Manager.
2 Use the Quadrant object snap to create a line starting from the left side of the part. With polar
snap on, move the cursor upward and enter 100 to make the line 100 mm long. Create another
100 mm line on the right side of the part.
Fillet Corners | 107
3 Use the Endpoint object snap to create a line connecting the upper ends of the vertical lines.
4 Offset the horizontal line downward by 12 mm.
5 Trim the lower ends of the vertical lines to create the rectangular outline of the top view.
6 Offset the topmost horizontal line upward by 3 mm. Create vertical lines from the quadrants of
the other circles as shown.
7 Trim the four vertical lines representing the silhouette edges of the holes as shown. Don’t forget
to press ENTER after selecting the horizontal boundary line for the trimming.
8 Trim the other vertical lines as shown. Zoom and pan as needed.
boundary line
for trim
108 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
9 Trim the topmost horizontal line as shown.
10 Create a vertical line that starts from the endpoint of the arc and ends perpendicular to the
horizontal line as shown. This line will be the trim boundary for the runout on the part.
11 Trim the horizontal line to the boundary line as shown.
12 Erase the vertical trim boundary line.
boundary line
for trim
boundary line
for trim
erase line
Fillet Corners | 109
13 Extend the remaining vertical line as shown.
14 Add 1 mm fillets to the outside corners.
The top view is almost complete. You still need to change the hidden silhouette edges of the holes
to a dashed linetype.
To change the linetype of the four vertical lines, you will override the linetype property currently
assigned to the lines. As you remember, you can select the objects and then use either the Properties
palette or the Properties toolbar to specify the required linetype.
Change linetypes
1 Select the four vertical silhoutte edges of the holes.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties.
Notice that because you selected more than one object, only the common properties are listed.
3 On the Properties palette, click Linetype. Click the arrow and, from the list, click
ACAD_ISO02W100.
4 Click Linetype Scale. Type 0.3 for the new linetype scale and press ENTER.
5 Move your cursor off the Properties palette and press ESC to clear the selection.
The four lines are now displayed with a dashed linetype.
NOTE Instead of changing the linetype of the four lines individually, you could have created a new
layer for hidden lines. The linetype property of that layer could then be set to ACAD_ISO02W100. Then,
to change the linetype of the four lines, you would change the layer assignment of the lines to the new
layer.
6 The tutorial is complete. If you want to keep this drawing, save it now.
extend line
silhouette edges
110 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Match Properties
You can easily copy properties of one object to other objects. You can choose to match color, layer,
linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, thickness, plot style, and in some cases dimension styles, text
styles, and hatch patterns.
Try it: Copy the properties from one object to other objects
1 Start a new drawing.
2 Draw several objects with different color properties.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Match Properties.
4 Click the source object from which you want to copy properties.
5 Click the objects to which you want to copy the properties.
You can also use the Settings option of the command to select the properties you want to match and
clear the ones you don’t.
Use Editing Aids | 111
Use Editing Aids
The following editing aids help you modify drawings efficiently:
■ Grips edit objects using your cursor and a shortcut menu.
■ Revision clouds identify areas that have been updated.
Edit with Grips
Grips are small squares and arrows that appear on an object after it has been selected. They mark
control locations and are powerful editing tools.
After you select an object, you can click a grip and move it with your cursor. For more options, click
a grip and right-click to display a shortcut menu. Then choose a grip edit mode.
select line click grip
move grip to end of
horizontal line
1
2
Grip edit modes
Grip edit mode options
112 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Try it: Edit objects using grips
1 Draw several objects.
2 Click several objects to select them and to display their grips.
3 Click a grip on an object and click its new location. This is the default stretch mode.
■ Notice the grip behavior when object snaps are turned on.
■ Notice the grip behavior when you stretch a grip onto another grip.
4 Click a grip on an object and then right-click.
5 Choose a different grip mode such as Move, Mirror, Rotate, or Scale.
6 Press ESC to exit grip editing.
Create Revision Clouds
If you review or redline drawings, you can increase your productivity by using revision clouds to
highlight your markups. You draw the revision cloud around the objects you want to emphasize,
creating a polyline in the shape of a cloud, as shown in the following illustration.
Try it: Create a revision cloud
1 Click Draw menu ➤ Revision Cloud.
2 Click anywhere in the drawing area and move your cursor to encompass an area.
3 Repeat the command and see whether the revision cloud always creates the arcs outward or if
you can trick it.
Analyze Drawings | 113
Analyze Drawings
You can extract information from your model using the inquiry commands. The most commonly
used one is the DIST command.
Use DIST to quickly determine the relationship between two points. You can display the following
information for two points you specify:
■ Distance between them in drawing units
■ Angle between the points in the XY plane
■ Angle of the points from the XY plane
■ Delta, or difference, between the X, Y, and Z coordinate values of each point
Try it: Find the distance and angle between two points
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance.
2 Use an object snap to locate a point on an object.
3 Use another object snap to locate a point on a different object.
4 Review the data displayed in the command window.
5 Press F2 to see the data in a larger window called the Text window.
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Erase objects Modify ➤ Erase Modify
Extend objects Modify ➤ Extend Modify
Trim objects Modify ➤ Trim Modify
Copy objects in a drawing
Copy objects between drawings
Modify ➤ Copy
Edit ➤ Copy
Modify
Standard
Offset objects Modify ➤ Offset Modify
Mirror objects Modify ➤ Mirror Modify
Move objects Modify ➤ Move Modify
Rotate objects Modify ➤ Rotate Modify
Fillet objects Modify ➤ Fillet Modify
Edit properties Tools ➤ Properties
Modify ➤ Properties
Standard
114 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications
Help system
ERASE, EXTEND, TRIM, COPY, COPYCLIP, PASTECLIP, OFFSET, MIRROR, MOVE, ROTATE, UNITS, FILLET,
PROPERTIES, MATCHPROP, OPTIONS, REVCLOUD, DIST
Review and Recall
1 What is the difference between a crossing selection and a window selection?
2 What is the fastest way to create several parallel lines?
3 What is the easiest way to create an arc that is tangent to two other objects?
4 When creating or modifying an object, what do you do to display the object snap menu?
5 What is an easy way to find the distance between two points in a drawing?
Match properties Modify ➤ Match
Properties
Standard
Create revision clouds Draw ➤ Revision
Cloud
Draw
Extract information from objects Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤
Distance
Inquiry
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Hatch to fill areas with patterns or solid colors
that help identify the subject matter or material
Create blocks when you want
to use drawings or parts of
drawings repeatedly
These symbols, called blocks in AutoCAD LT,
represent standard items such as trees or bushes
Add Symbols and Hatches
Overview of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Benefits of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Sources of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Insert Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tutorial: Adding Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Overview of Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Use Standard Hatch Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Associative Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Insert Hatches or Solid Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Define Hatch Boundaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tutorial: Add Hatches to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
118 | Chapter 8 Add Symbols and Hatches
Overview of Blocks
In AutoCAD LT, symbols are called blocks. A block is a collection of objects that are associated into a
single object. A block can be used to represent an object such as a tree, a fastener, or a door.
Blocks are typically defined and stored in drawings called block libraries, or symbol libraries, from
which they can be inserted into other drawings. An entire drawing can also be inserted as a block.
Blocks may also include block attributes, which store data such as part numbers, dates, and
performance ratings.
Benefits of Blocks
Using blocks makes it easier and faster to get your work done:
■ Create drawings efficiently by inserting, relocating, and copying blocks rather than individual
geometric objects.
■ Build a standard library of frequently used symbols, components, or standard parts.
■ Store associated data with block attributes which can be extracted to create reports.
■ Manage blocks with DesignCenter. DesignCenter provides convenient organization and access to
thousands of symbols on your computer, on your local network, and on the World Wide Web.
Sources of Blocks
There are several sources of blocks that you can use in your drawings.
■ Your computer. AutoCAD LT provides over 300 standard blocks in 15 symbol library drawings in
the DesignCenter folder.
■ Your company network. You can also create your own blocks and block libraries, or your
company may already have its own standard libraries.
■ The World Wide Web. Numerous Autodesk and commercial symbol libraries containing
thousands of blocks are available, including several that are available free by using the DC Online
tab in DesignCenter.
NOTE Creating blocks, block attributes, or block libraries are more advanced topics and are not
covered in this guide.
block references
of fastener
inserted into a
drawing
block definition for
fastener
Insert Blocks | 119
Insert Blocks
AutoCAD LT provides the following three methods for inserting blocks into drawings:
■ Insert dialog box. Place a block by specifying its insertion point, scale, and rotation angle.
■ DesignCenter. Locate symbol libraries and place or drag a block into a drawing or onto a tool
palette. Use DesignCenter to locate and manage a large number of blocks and block libraries.
■ Tool Palettes window. Place or drag a block into a drawing. Use tool palettes to organize and
access your most commonly used blocks.
Tutorial: Adding Blocks
1 Open MyDesign, the drawing that you created and saved in a previous tutorial.
2 Offset the lines to create walls (if it’s a health spa or motor housing) or ridges (if it’s a catch for a
window lock). Use a value for the offset distance that is appropriate for what you are creating.
Clean up the corners using Fillet with the fillet radius set to 0.
120 | Chapter 8 Add Symbols and Hatches
Open a block library
1 Click Tools menu ➤ DesignCenter.
The DesignCenter window is divided into the tree view on the left side and the content area on
the right side.
2 On the DesignCenter window, click the Folders tab if necessary. In the tree view, navigate to the
Help\Tutorials\Symbol Libraries folder.
3 Click the plus sign (+) on the block library that’s appropriate for your drawing:
■ Fasteners - Metric.dwg
■ Fasteners - US.dwg
■ Office - Metric.dwg
■ Office - US.dwg
4 Click the Blocks item under the drawing that you just expanded. The blocks become visible in
the Content area of DesignCenter.
Place and relocate blocks with DesignCenter
1 Drag one of the blocks from DesignCenter into your drawing. The precise location is not
important.
2 Click the block. Notice the colored grip that displays. Drag the grip to move the block into place.
3 Click the grip and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click Rotate. Rotate the block either with
the cursor or by entering a rotation angle.
4 In DesignCenter, double-click a different block.
5 In the Insert dialog box, under Rotation, click Specify On-Screen. Click OK.
6 Click a location in your drawing. You are prompted to specify a rotation angle. Rotate the block
either with the cursor or by entering a rotation angle.
7 Close the DesignCenter window.
Place blocks with the Insert dialog box
1 Click Insert menu ➤ Block.
2 In the Insert dialog box, click the arrow next to the Name box. These are the block definitions
currently stored in your drawing. Click one of them and click OK. Specify the location for the
block.
3 Add several more blocks to your drawing. Save the drawing.
Access block libraries from the Web
1 Open DesignCenter again.
2 Click the DC Online tab. If you have an Internet connection, you can explore the commercial
symbol libraries that are available.
Overview of Hatches | 121
Overview of Hatches
A hatch pattern is a standard pattern of lines or dots used to highlight an area in a drawing, or to
identify a material such as concrete, steel, or grass. In AutoCAD LT, a hatch pattern can also be a solid
fill.
Use Standard Hatch Patterns
AutoCAD LT supplies more than 60 industry-standard ISO and imperial hatch patterns. You can use
a pattern supplied with AutoCAD LT or one from an external pattern library. Hatch patterns are
stored in hatch pattern files with PAT extensions.
Associative Hatches
By default, hatches are associative. Associative hatches are linked to their boundaries and are updated
when the boundaries are modified. You can remove associativity from a hatch at any time.
Insert Hatches or Solid Fills
You can hatch or fill objects in a drawing using one of these methods:
■ Choose Hatch from the Draw menu or toolbar to create hatches and solid fills.
■ Use DesignCenter to drag hatches into the drawing or onto a tool palette.
Industry-standard
hatch patterns
ANSI31
INSUL
AR-CONC
Hatched object Result of editing
boundary with
nonassociative hatch
Result of editing
boundary with
associative hatch
122 | Chapter 8 Add Symbols and Hatches
■ Use a tool palette to drag commonly used hatches into a drawing quickly.
Define Hatch Boundaries
Hatch boundaries can be any combination of objects such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines, text, and
blocks. Hatch boundaries must enclose an area, but they can include islands (enclosed areas within
the hatch area) that you choose to hatch or leave unhatched.
Tutorial: Add Hatches to a Drawing
In this tutorial, you will hatch part of your drawing to look something like this:
1 Open MyDesign, the drawing that you created and saved in the previous tutorial.
2 Click Draw menu ➤ Hatch.
3 On the Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, notice the name of the hatch pattern and the swatch.
Choose a different hatch pattern.
4 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. Then click anywhere between the parallel lines for the
walls and press ENTER.
Result Boundaries detected Internal point selected
internal point
islands
Insert Hatches or Solid Fills | 123
5 At the bottom of the dialog box, click Preview.
There are probably several things that you’ll want to change, including the circle being hatched,
the hatch angle, and the hatch spacing.
6 Press ESC to return to the dialog box.
7 Click the > (More Options) button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog box.
8 Under Islands, click Outer. Then click the < (Less Options) button.
9 Under Angle and Scale, change the values for the angle and for the scale. If the hatch is too dense,
increase the value for the scale by a factor of 10.
10 Click Preview. If the hatch is still not acceptable, return to step 6. Otherwise, right-click or press
ENTER to accept the hatch.
11 Save your drawing file.
Help system
ADCENTER, BLOCK, EXPLODE, INSERT, TOOLPALETTES, HATCH
Review and Recall
1 What is a block?
2 What is a block library?
3 How can you use object snaps with blocks?
4 What are three ways to hatch an area in a drawing?
5 How do you fill an area with a solid color?
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Insert a blocks Insert ➤ Block Draw
Open DesignCenter Tools ➤ DesignCenter Standard
Open the Tool Palettes
window
Tools ➤ Tool Palettes Window Standard
Hatch an area Draw ➤ Hatch
Tools ➤ DesignCenter
Tools ➤ Tool Palettes Window
Draw
Standard
Add Text to a Drawing
Create and Modify Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Work with Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Create and Modify Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Set Text Size in Model Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
126 | Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing
Create and Modify Text
AutoCAD LT provides a text editor to add text to drawings. The In-Place Text Editor displays the
bounding box with a ruler at the top and the Text Formatting toolbar.
With the In-Place Text Editor, you can choose formatting that affects the entire text object or only
selected text. You can also control indents.
Before creating the text, you define the width of the text by specifying the two opposite corners of
a text boundary. Only the width of the box has an effect. AutoCAD LT inserts the text you enter in
the dialog box within this limit and wraps words that don’t fit to the next line.
When using the text editor, you can easily change the width by dragging the right side of the ruler.
NOTE The fastest way to make changes to an existing text object is to double-click it. This opens the
In-Place Text Editor and displays the text to be changed.
display menu options
display ruler
save changes and
close
set width of
multiline text
objects
ruler paragraph
indent
first-line indent
tab stops
Create and Modify Text | 127
Additional features that are available for text in drawings include
■ A spell checker with customizable dictionaries
■ The Find and Replace dialog box for locating and correcting text
■ The ability to create mirrored text
Try it: Create multiline text objects
1 Start a new drawing.
2 To display the text at a convenient size, zoom into a small area above the title block.
3 Click Draw menu ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text.
4 Click two points to determine the width of the text object.
5 In the In-Place Text Editor, type your text.
6 Highlight a word and click some of the formatting options.
These options are nearly identical with those in word processing applications.
7 Click OK on the Text Formatting toolbar.
Try it: Modify an existing text object
1 Double-click the text object.
2 Highlight more words or the entire paragraph and click more formatting options.
3 Click OK on the Text Formatting toolbar.
128 | Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing
Work with Text Styles
All text in an AutoCAD LT drawing has a text style associated with it. When you enter text, AutoCAD
LT uses the current text style, which determines the following properties:
■ Font controls the shapes of the characters
■ Font style controls the italic and boldface formatting for TrueType fonts
■ Height controls the size in drawing units of the text
■ Obliquing angle controls the forward or backward slant of the text
■ Orientation controls the vertical or horizontal alignment of single-line text
■ Other text characteristics controls effects such as wide text and backwards text
Create and Modify Text Styles
Except for the default STANDARD style, you must define any text style that you want to use. Once
you’ve created a style, you can modify its settings, change its name, or delete it when you no longer
need it. When you create or modify a text style, you use the Text Style dialog box.
If you change an existing style’s font, all text in the drawing that uses that style is regenerated using
the new font.
NOTE If you create notes and labels directly on a layout in paper space, no scaling is necessary. Notes
and labels created in model space must be sized to accommodate the scale of the layout viewport.
choose a different
text style
create a new
text style
sample text
shows the
changes you
make
specify a different
text font to be
used by the text
style
Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling | 129
Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling
With AutoCAD LT, you can create text either in model space or on the layout in paper space. The
space in which you create text depends on the circumstances.
■ If the text is more closely associated with the layout, you should create the text in paper space.
With this option, there are no scaling considerations and you create the text at its full size (1:1).
■ If the text is more closely associated with the model, and you anticipate referencing the model
and the text from other drawings or other views, you should create the text in model space. With
this option, the text must usually be scaled.
Preparing one or more views on a drawing layout usually involves displaying them in layout
viewports at various scales other than 1:1. If you create text in model space, you must size it for
correct display and plotting in paper space.
Set Text Size in Model Space
Set the text size in model space using the following formula:
Text size in model space = desired text size/scale of the layout viewport
■ Example 1: If the desired text size is 3 mm and the viewport scale is 1:4 (0.25),
then use 3/0.25 = 12 mm for the text size in model space.
■ Example 2: If the desired text size is 1/8 inch and the viewport scale is 1”=4’ (1:48),
then use (1/8)/(1/48) = 48/8 = 6 inches for the text size in model space.
Obviously, creating text directly on the layout is much easier because no scaling is required. It is
recommended that you create view-specific text in model space, and general notes, tables, and labels
in paper space.
Help system
FIND, MTEXT, MIRRTEXT, MTEXTED, SPELL, STYLE, SCALETEXT, JUSTIFYTEXT, STYLE, SPACETRANS
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Create multiline text Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Draw, Text
Modify text Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text Text
Check the spelling in a drawing Tools ➤ Spelling
Find and replace text Edit ➤ Find Text
Creating text styles Format ➤ Text Style Text
130 | Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing
Review and Recall
1 What is the fastest way to open the In-Place Text Editor when you need to change existing text?
2 What are some advantages to creating additional text styles?
3 How do you decide whether to create text in paper space or in model space?
4 What text height should you use in model space if the desired text height in paper space is 2.5 mm
and the display scale of the layout viewport is 1/50 (0.02)?
Continued
Linear
(Vertical)
Linear
(Horizontal)
Aligned
Baseline
Center Mark
Ordinate
Diameter
Angular Quick Leader
Radius
Add Dimensions
Dimensions Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Parts of a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Associative Dimensions and Leaders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Tutorial: Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Use Dimensioning Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Create Center Marks and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Create Leaders with Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Create and Modify Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Modify Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
134 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions
Dimensions Overview
Dimensions show the geometric measurements of objects, the distances or angles between objects,
or the location of a feature. AutoCAD LT offers four general types of dimensions:
■ Linear. Measures distances using horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, baseline (parallel), and
continued (chain) dimensions.
■ Ordinate. Measures the distance of a point from a specified origin point.
■ Radial. Measures the radii and diameters of arcs and circles.
■ Angular. Measures the angle formed by two lines or three points.
Parts of a Dimension
Dimensions have several distinct elements:
■ Dimension line. Indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angles, the dimension line
is an arc.
■ Extension line. Extends from the feature being dimensioned to the dimension line.
■ Dimension text. Reflects dimension value and may include prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances.
Alternatively, you can supply your own text or suppress the text entirely.
■ Arrowhead. Indicates an end of the dimension line. Several types of arrowheads are available,
including architectural ticks and dots.
■ Leader. Forms a solid line leading from an annotation to the referenced feature. Depending on
the dimension style, leaders can be created automatically when dimension text won’t fit between
extension lines. You can also create leader lines to connect text or a block with a feature.
Associative Dimensions and Leaders
By default, AutoCAD LT creates associative dimensions. The measurements displayed by associative
dimensions are updated automatically as you modify the objects with which they are associated.
Leader objects are composed of text, a leader line, and an arrowhead.
■ If the text portion of a leader object is moved, the leader line is also adjusted.
■ If a leader object is associated with a geometric object, and the object is moved, stretched, or
scaled, the arrowhead and the leader portion of the leader object are also updated.
dimension line
extension line
dimension text
arrowhead
leader
Create Dimensions | 135
Create Dimensions
You can dimension lines, arcs, circles, and several other types of objects. There are two primary
methods for creating dimensions:
■ Select an object to dimension (1) and specify the dimension line location (2) as shown in the
following examples.
■ Use object snaps to specify the extension line origins, and then specify the dimension line
location. The extension line origin points can be on separate objects.
Tutorial: Create Dimensions
In this tutorial, you will set the scale for your drawing and add several dimensions to your design.
1 Open MyDesign, the drawing that you created and saved in previous tutorials.
2 Click the layout tab near the bottom-left of the application window.
Result of selecting a line
for a dimension
Result of selecting a circle
for a dimension
1
2
1
2
136 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions
Set the display scale of the viewport.
1 Click the blue layout viewport border to select it.
2 Click Modify ➤ Properties.
3 On the Properties palette, click Display Locked and then No.
Note It is strongly recommended that you keep the display in layout viewports locked unless you’re
setting the display scale of the viewport. This prevents you or someone else from accidentally zooming
in or out and changing the display scale.
4 Double-click inside the layout viewport. You are now accessing model space from the layout.
5 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Extents.
This step centers your view.
6 Double-click outside the layout viewport to return to paper space.
You can now specify the precise scale for the floor plan or part.
7 Click the blue layout viewport border to select it. On the Properties palette, under Misc, click
Standard Scale.
8 Click the arrow to display a list of scales. Click the one that seems the most appropriate for the
sheet size and the size of your floor plan or part. You can always choose a different scale if
necessary.
9 Lock the layout viewport.
Add dimensions
1 Change the current layer to the Dimensions layer.
It is a good practice to use a separate layer reserved for dimension objects.
2 Double-click inside the layout viewport to access model space.
There is a good reason why you are creating dimensions from the layout tab rather than the
Model tab. When you dimension in model space from the layout tab, the dimensions are
automatically scaled relative to the viewport scale.
3 Click Dimension menu ➤ Linear. Follow the prompts to create several linear dimensions.
Create Dimensions | 137
4 Experiment with several other types of dimensions.
NOTE Automatic dimension scaling is not turned on in all drawings or drawing template files. It works
only when the system variable DIMSCALE is set to 0. You can enter DIMSCALE on the command line.
Check the Help system topic on DIMSCALE for more information.
Add Text
1 Double-click outside the layout viewport to return to paper space.
2 Change the current layer to the Text layer.
3 Create several notes using multiline text.
4 Save your drawing.
138 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions
Use Dimensioning Options
In addition to the basic types of dimensions, AutoCAD LT provides these options on the Dimension
menu and toolbar:
■ Center marks and centerlines locate the exact center of circles or arcs.
■ Leader lines connect annotation to drawing features.
■ Geometric tolerances show deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of
drawing features.
Create Center Marks and Lines
You can easily create a center mark or centerline on a circle or arc. The size and style of center marks
and centerlines are controlled by the dimension style.
Try it: Create center marks and lines
1 Start a new drawing and click the Model tab.
2 Draw a small circle.
3 Click Dimension ➤ Center mark and click the circle.
Two lines in the shape of a plus are created at the center of the circle.
You can also create center marks with the radius and diameter dimensions.
center mark
centerlines
Use Dimensioning Options | 139
Create Leaders with Annotation
You can create a leader from any point or feature in a drawing. Leaders can be straight line segments
or smooth spline curves. Leader color, scale, and arrowhead style are controlled by the current
dimension style. A small line known as a hook line usually connects the annotation to the leader line.
Leader annotations can be multiline text, a feature control frame, or a block reference.
The simple leader in the example was created by specifying the From (1) and To (2) points of the
leader, pressing ENTER, and then entering the leader text.
2
1
leader line
hook line
140 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions
Create and Modify Dimension Styles
Every dimension has a dimension style associated with it. Dimension styles help you establish and
enforce drafting standards. Dimension styles also make changing dimension formats and behavior
easy. A dimension style defines
■ Format and position of dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks
■ Appearance, position, and behavior of dimension text
■ Rules governing text placement and dimension lines
■ Overall dimension scale
■ Format and precision of primary, alternate, and angular dimension units
■ Format and precision of tolerance values
New dimensions use the current settings in the Dimension Style Manager dialog box. The default
STANDARD style is assigned to dimensions until you set another style as current.
Overrides allow for style modifications to the current dimension style. Overrides apply to all
subsequent dimensions created with that style until you make a new style current. They do not
permanently modify a dimension style. You can also override properties of dimensions using the
Properties palette.
Regardless of whether you choose New, Modify, or Override in the Dimension Style Manager, the
same set of options are available:
■ Lines sets the appearance and behavior of dimension lines and extension lines.
■ Symbols and Arrows sets the appearance and behavior of dimension arrowheads, center marks,
and centerlines.
■ Text sets the dimension text appearance, placement, and alignment.
Create and Modify Dimension Styles | 141
■ Fit sets options governing placement of dimension lines, extension lines, and text. It also
includes the setting for automatic dimension scaling.
■ Primary Units sets the format (for example, scientific, decimal, architectural) and precision of
linear and angular dimension units.
■ Alternate Units sets alternate unit format and precision. This feature supports dual dimensions
that display, for example, both metric and imperial units.
■ Tolerances sets tolerance values and precision.
NOTE Creating a dimension style to conform with industry or company standards requires agreement
on over 70 settings. It is important that your organization creates and maintains one or more official
dimension styles.
142 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions
Modify Dimensions
You can modify dimensions with grips or with the AutoCAD LT editing commands. You can also
modify or override dimension styles, as discussed in the previous topic. For significant modifications
to a dimension, it is usually easier to erase and re-create the dimension.
The easiest way to make minor modifications in a dimension is to use grips. For example, you can
easily drag a dimension line to align it with another dimension line.
You can also drag dimension text to a different location.
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Create linear dimensions Dimension ➤ Linear
Create aligned dimensions Dimension ➤ Aligned
Create ordinate dimensions Dimension ➤ Ordinate
1 Click dimension
2 Click grip at end of
dimension line
3 Move grip to new
dimension location
1 Click dimension
2 Click grip on
dimension text
3 Move grip to relocate
dimension text
Modify Dimensions | 143
Help system
DIMALIGNED, DIMANGULAR, DIMBASELINE, DIMCONTINUE, DIMDIAMETER, DIMJOGGED, DIMLINEAR,
DIMORDINATE, DIMRADIUS, DIMSCALE, DIMSTYLE, DIMEDIT, DIMTEDIT, DIMOVERRIDE, DIMCENTER,
QLEADER, DIMSTYLE, DIMREGEN
Create radius dimensions Dimension ➤ Radius
Create diameter dimensions Dimension ➤ Diameter
Create angular dimensions Dimension ➤ Angular
Create baseline dimensions Dimension ➤ Baseline
Create continued dimensions Dimension ➤ Continue
Create and modify a
dimension style
Dimension ➤ Dimension Style
Update an existing dimension to
reflect a style change
Dimension ➤ Update
Create a center mark Dimension ➤ Center mark
Create leaders with annotation Dimension ➤ Leader
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
144 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions
Review and Recall
1 What is the behavior of associative leaders and associative dimensions?
2 Why should you lock layout viewports?
3 To ensure that dimensions are scaled according to the layout viewport scale, what dimension variable
should be set to 0?
4 What is the easiest way to modify the location of a dimension feature such as the dimension line or
dimension text?
The model
Created at full size (1:1). Text
and dimensions in model
space are scaled to compen-
sate for the scale factors used
in layout viewports
Layout
Represents a
drawing sheet
that includes a
title block, one
or more layout
viewports, and
text objects
Layout viewports
Display one or more views of the model, each of which
can be scaled separately
Plot styles
Temporaily override properties such as
color and lineweight when plotting
Page Setups
Save plot settings by name and
associate them with a layout
Create Layouts and Plots
Work with Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Create a New Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Use Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tutorial: Work with Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Choose and Configure Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Add a Plotter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Change a Plotter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Use Plot Styles to Override Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Plot from a Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Page Setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tutorial: Plot a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
148 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots
Work with Layouts
You use a layout to compose the plotted page. A layout typically includes the following objects:
■ General notes and tables
■ View-specific label blocks and callout blocks (this is an advanced topic not covered in this guide)
■ Layout viewports
Layouts show the page border and actual printing area. The page size and actual printing area
depend on the printer or plotter assigned to the layout.
Create a New Layout
The two most common reasons for creating a new layout are
■ Creating a new drawing template file that includes a different paper size and orientation.
■ Adding a layout with a different paper size, orientation, and title block to an existing drawing.
The easiest way to create a new layout is to use the Create Layout wizard. Once you create a layout,
you can replace the title block and create or delete layout viewports.
page border printable
area
layout tab layout viewport, displays
a view of model space
Work with Layouts | 149
Try it: Create a layout
1 Start a new drawing.
2 Click Tools menu ➤ Wizards ➤ Create Layout.
3 Follow the steps in the wizard to create a layout with a different paper size and matching title
block.
4 Right-click the layout tab. On the shortcut menu, click Rename. In the Rename Layout dialog
box, enter a new name for the layout. Click OK.
To save this drawing as a new drawing template file, click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Save Drawing
As dialog box, under Files of Type, specify a DWT extension.
Use Layout Viewports
Layout viewports on a layout tab display views of model space. The following points summarize the
relationship of layout viewports and model space:
■ The majority of the objects in your drawings are created in model space on the Model tab.
■ To display and scale views of model space in a layout, you create layout viewports.
■ You enter model space through a layout viewport primarily to pan the view and to set layer
visibility.
■ You can control the visibility of layers separately in each layout viewport.
■ For any significant editing of your drawing, use the Model tab.
■ To create correctly scaled dimensions, enter model space from the layout tab and then dimension
the model.
Create and Modify Layout Viewports
When you create a new layout, a single layout viewport is added by default. You can add more layout
viewports for independent views such as details and 3D views. Each viewport can have its own scale,
plot properties, and layer visibility settings.
Tutorial: Work with Layout Viewports
In this tutorial, you will practice the most common operations used with layout viewports.
Change the display scale of a view in a layout viewport
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT installation folder
and open arbor.dwg.
3 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the lightbulb icon on the Viewport layer to display the
objects on that layer. Click OK.
The blue borders of the layout viewports are now visible.
4 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties. Then click the blue border of the upper-right layout viewport.
Notice that the Properties palette contains the property settings for the layout viewport.
150 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots
5 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Display Locked. Click the arrow and click No.
The display properties for the layout viewport are now unlocked. Next, you will change the
precise scale of the view displayed in this layout viewport.
6 In the Properties palette, click Standard Scale.
7 Click the arrow to display a list of scales and click 1:40.
Notice that the view changes immediately to reflect the new display scale.
8 Double-click inside the layout viewport to enter Model Space. Pan the view as needed, but do not
change the view scale with Zoom. Then double-click anywhere outside the layout viewports to
return to Paper Space.
9 Use the Properties palette to lock the layout viewport.
You lock the layout viewport to prevent accidental panning and zooming in it. Thus, the view
position and scale in the viewport are protected.
Erase a layout viewport
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase.
2 Click the border of the upper-right layout viewport and press ENTER.
A layout viewport is an object. Like other objects, it can be moved, copied, and erased.
Create a new layout viewport
1 Make the Viewport layer the current layer.
2 Click View menu ➤ Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport.
3 Click two points in a blank area on the layout. The two points are the diagonal corners of the
new layout viewport.
The new layout viewport can overlap an existing viewport.
4 Click the border of the layout viewport to display its grips.
5 Adjust the size of the layout viewport by clicking a grip, moving the cursor, and clicking a new
location. Move the layout viewport with the Move command.
6 Use the Properties palette to set the display scale of the view in the layout viewport.
7 Double-click within the layout viewport and pan the view. Double-click outside of all viewports
to return to paper space.
8 Use the Properties palette to lock the layout viewport.
9 Turn the Viewport layer off.
10 Close the drawing without saving it.
NOTE Make sure that you create layout viewports on their own layer. When you are ready to plot, turn
off the layer to prevent the viewport borders from being plotted.
Choose and Configure Plotters | 151
Choose and Configure Plotters
AutoCAD LT supports a wide range of printers and plotters. Devices with a Windows printer driver
installed are available automatically when you plot unless the plotting option to hide system
printers has been selected. Many plotters that do not have Windows drivers (nonsystem plotters) can
be configured for use with AutoCAD LT using drivers provided either by Autodesk or by the plotter
manufacturer.
You can also configure drivers to save drawings in several file formats. Formats include DWF

(Design
Web Format) files to view drawings in a web browser or external viewer, PostScript files for use with
page layout programs, and raster files.
If an output device is not listed in the Plot or Page Setup dialog boxes, or if its settings are incorrect,
you can easily add or edit printer and plotter configurations.
Add a Plotter Configuration
The Plotter Manager is a folder that provides a method for adding, deleting, and changing plotter
configurations. Plotter configuration files have a .pc3 extension and are stored in the Plotters folder.
To display the Plotters folder, click File menu ➤ Plotter Manager.
The Plotter Manager includes plotter configuration (PC3) files for every nonsystem printer that you
install. Plotter configuration files can also be created for Windows
®
system printers if you want the
program to use default properties different from those used by Windows.
To add a plotter configuration, double-click the Add-A-Plotter wizard in the Plotter Manager. The
Add-A-Plotter wizard prompts you for information about your plotter, including
■ Whether the plotter is attached to your computer or on a network
■ The type of plotter, including manufacturer and model
■ Whether to use a plotter configuration file from previous versions of the product
■ Whether to output to a computer port or file, and which port to use
The Plotter Manager
152 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots
■ Raster and vector graphics quality settings
■ Custom properties that depend on the plotter type
■ A unique name for the new plotter configuration
Once a new PC3 file is created, the plotter configuration is available for layouts and plotting.
Change a Plotter Configuration
The Plotter Configuration Editor is used to
■ Edit the port or file output information
■ Change or add paper sizes and layouts
■ Control vector and raster graphic output
■ Calibrate your plotter
Set any of your plotter’s custom propertiesTo start the Plotter Configuration Editor, either double-
click the PC3 file or choose Properties in the Plot dialog box.
Use Plot Styles to Override Properties
A plot style is an optional method to control how each object or layer is plotted. Assigning a plot style
to an object or layer overrides properties such as color and lineweight for plotting. Only the
appearance of plotted objects is affected.
Plot style tables collect groups of plot styles and save them in a file that you can later specify when
plotting. The Plot Style Manager is a folder that contains all the available plot style tables and the
Add-A-Plot Style wizard.
There are two types of plot style tables:
■ Color-dependent plot style tables. An object’s color determines how it is plotted. The files have
the extension .ctb. You cannot assign color-dependent plot styles directly to objects. Instead, to
control how an object is plotted, you change its color. For example, all red objects in a drawing
can be set to plot with a 0.50 mm lineweight.
■ Named plot style tables. Plot styles are assigned directly to objects and layers. The files have the
extension .stb. Using them enables each object in a drawing to be plotted differently, independent
of its color.
Use the Plot Style Manager to add, delete, rename, copy, and edit plot style tables. You can access the
Plot Style Manager from the Files menu.
Plot from a Layout | 153
Plot from a Layout
After you have completed your drawing, you are ready to plot. In the Plot dialog box, you select the
printer or plotter and many other settings.
Before you plot your drawing, it is a good practice to generate a full plot preview. If the image is not
correct, make changes to the plot settings, page setup, and the plot style table attached to the layout.
Page Setups
To manage plot settings, you can name and save them as a page setup using the Page Setup Manager.
When you are ready to plot, you can specify the name of the page setup in the Plot dialog box.
For example, let’s say you switch to a different plotter for color output. You can quickly restore all
settings associated with that plotter by specifying the name of a previously saved page setup. To
switch back, you can specify the name of the original page setup.
Each layout tab can have an associated named page setup. Page setups are saved in the drawing.
Try it: Create a page setup
1 Start a new drawing. If necessary, click a layout tab.
2 Click File menu ➤ Page Setup Manager.
3 Click New.
select the
area of the
drawing to
plot
select a
page
orientation
generate a
preview
specify a plot
scale
position the layout on
the page
select a
page size
select a
printer
or a
plotter
display or hide options
specify a plot
style
154 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots
4 In the New Page Setup dialog box, enter My_New_Plotter. Click OK.
5 Change some settings in the Page Setup dialog box. Click OK.
The new page setup name is displayed in the Page Setup Manager.
6 Click My_New_Plotter and click Set Current.
The My_New_Plotter page setup is now associated with the current layout tab.
7 Click Close.
If you don’t specify all the settings in the Page Setup dialog box when you create a layout, you can
set up the page just before you plot.
Tutorial: Plot a Drawing
In this exercise, you edit the page setup for an existing layout, create a new layout, insert a title block
into the new layout, and plot the drawing.
Edit an existing layout
To prepare for plotting from a layout tab, you set up a layout, set up a viewport, and create
dimensions.
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, locate the \Help\Tutorials folder and select plan.dwg.
3 Click Open.
This is a drawing of a floor plan and elevation.
4 Click the Elevation layout tab.
The Elevation layout uses a page setup that defines the plot area and page size. A specific plotter
configuration is also associated with the Elevation layout.
5 Click File menu ➤ Page Setup Manager.
6 In the Page Setup Manager, click Modify.
7 Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), open the drop-down list and click the monochrome.ctb
file. If prompted, choose not to apply the plot style table to all other layouts.
8 Select Display Plot Styles. Click OK.
9 Click Close to close the Page Setup Manager.
The drawing is now black and white because the layout shows a preview of the drawing as it will
be plotted with the monochrome plot style table.
10 Click the Model tab. Note that the model is still displayed in color.
Create a new layout
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Wizards ➤ Create Layout.
The Create Layout wizard guides you through the creation of a layout.
Plot from a Layout | 155
2 In the Create Layout wizard, on the Begin page, enter a name for the new layout. Type Elevation
and Floor Plan. Click Next.
3 On the Printer page, select the printer that you want to use to plot this layout. Select DWF6
ePlot.pc3. Click Next.
For this tutorial, you will plot the drawing to a DWF file rather than to a plotter. DWF (Design
Web Format) files are convenient for distributing drawings using email, FTP sites, project
websites, or CDs. They can be viewed using the free Autodesk® DWF Viewer. DWF files are
smaller, faster, and provide greater resolution than other popular options.
4 On the Paper Size page, the paper sizes available in the list are based on the printer that you
selected. Select Letter or ANSI A (8.5 × 11.0 inches) for the paper size. Make sure that Paper Size
in Units lists a width of 11.0 inches and a height of 8.5 inches. Click Next.
5 On the Orientation page, click Portrait for that orientation. Click Next.
6 On the Title Block page, click None from the list of available title blocks. Click Next. (You insert
a title block once the layout is created.)
7 On the Define Viewports page, under Viewport Setup, click Array. Leave the Viewport Scale as
Scaled to Fit. (You change the scale later.) In the Rows box, type 2. In the Columns box, type 1.
In the Spacing Between Rows box, type 0.25. In the Spacing Between Columns box, type 0.1. This
creates two viewports, vertically aligned, with a gap between them. Click Next.
8 On the Pick Location page, select Select Location. In the drawing area, click and drag to create a
rectangular layout viewport that is just inside the printable area (the dashed lines).
9 On the Finish page, click Finish to complete the creation of the new layout and viewports.
Notice that two viewports have been created.
select the
Array option.
specify 2 rows
with 1 column.
156 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots
Insert a title block into a layout
1 Make sure that you are on the Elevation and Floor Plan layout tab.
2 Click Insert menu ➤ Block.
3 In the Insert dialog box, in the Name list, click Letter (portrait).
4 Under Insertion Point, clear the Specify On-screen check box. Then, in the X and Y boxes, type
0.4. The Z box should be 0.0.
5 Under Scale, clear the Specify On-screen check box. Then, in the X, Y, and Z boxes, type 1 to set
the layout to be plotted full scale.
6 Under Rotation, clear the Specify On-screen check box. Then, in the Angle box, type 0 to keep
the title block horizontal.
7 Click OK.
Set up the viewports to plot
Now that the layout viewports have been created, you specify the scale of the model space view
displayed in each viewport. To change the scale of a viewport, you change the zoom magnification
of the view. To change the portion of the model space drawing displayed in the viewport without
changing the scale, you pan the view.
1 Select both of the viewports by clicking their borders.
2 On the Modify menu, click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, click Layer and select the Viewports layer from the drop-down list.
Plot from a Layout | 157
4 In the Properties palette, click the Standard Scale box and select 3/32"=1' from the drop-down list
of scales.
5 The model space objects are scaled correctly for plotting at 3/32"=1' (1:128).
6 Double-click inside the top viewport to switch to model space. Pan the image in the viewport
until only the elevation view is displayed.
7 Click inside the bottom viewport to make it current. Pan the image in the viewport until only
the floor plan is displayed.
8 Click Format menu ➤ Layer.
9 In the Layer Properties Manager, in the Name column, select the Viewports layer. In the Plot
column, click the Plot/No Plot icon to turn off plotting for the Viewport layer. Click OK.
10 Double-click anywhere outside the viewports to return to paper space. Then lock both viewports.
Plotting is turned off for the viewport borders, but the objects displayed in the viewport are still
plotted. Alternatively, you could have turned off the Viewport layer.
Plot the layout
Now that you have created a layout and have prepared the layout viewports for plotting, you are
ready to plot the drawing.
1 Click File menu ➤ Plot.
The plotter you chose in the wizard is still selected.
2 If necessary, click the > button at the bottom-right corner of the Plot dialog box to display more
plot options.
3 Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), in the Name list, select the monochrome.ctb file.
4 Under Plot Area, click Extents.
This option plots all objects on the layout tab regardless of location.
5 Under Drawing Orientation, click Portrait.
6 Under Plot Scale, set the scale of the plot to 1:1.
7 Under Plot Offset, click Center the Plot.
8 Click Preview at the bottom of the dialog box. After previewing the plot, press ESC. Click OK to
close the Plot dialog box and plot the drawing to the DWF file.
You could now send the DWF file to a client for review with the Autodesk DWF Viewer, which is
available free on the Autodesk website.
158 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots
9 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, enter Plan Complete in the File
Name box, and then click Save.
Help system
LAYOUT, LAYOUTWIZARD, MVIEW, PLOTTERMANAGER, OPTIONS, PAGESETUP, PLOTSTAMP, PLOT,
STYLESMANAGER, PLOTSTYLE, CONVERTPSTYLES, CONVERTCTB
Review and Recall
1 What types of objects are commonly found on a layout tab?
2 How do you specify the scale of a layout viewport?
3 How do you turn off the display of layout viewport borders?
4 How can you use a plot style table?
5 What is a fast way to save plot settings by name?
To get started
Action Menu Toolbar
Create a new layout Insert ➤ Layout Layouts
Create a layout viewport View ➤ Viewports ➤ 1
Viewport
Layouts or
Viewports
Scale a view in a layout
viewport
Tools ➤ Properties Viewports
Add a plotter or modify a
plotter configuration
File ➤ Plotter Manager
Override properties when
plotting
File ➤ Plot Style Manager
Restore saved settings for
plotting
File ➤ Page Setup Manager Layouts
Plot a layout File ➤ Plot Standard
Glossary
Commands associated with definitions are shown in parentheses at the end of the definition.
Term Definition
absolute coordinates Coordinate values measured from a coordinate system’s origin
point. See also origin, relative coordinates, user coordinate
system (UCS), world coordinates, and world coordinate system
(WCS).
aligned dimension A dimension that measures the distance between two points at any
angle. The dimension line is parallel to the line connecting the
dimension’s definition points. (DIMALIGNED)
angle override Locks the cursor for the next point entered. To specify an angle
override, enter a left angle bracket (<) followed by an angle
whenever a command prompts you to specify a point.
angular dimension A dimension that measures angles or arc segments and consists of
text, extension lines, and leaders. (DIMANGULAR)
angular unit The unit of measurement for an angle. Angular units can be
measured in decimal degrees, degrees/minutes/seconds, grads, and
radians.
annotation Text, dimensions, tolerances, symbols, or notes.
array 1. Multiple copies of selected objects in a rectangular or polar
(radial) pattern. (ARRAY) 2. A collection of data items, each
identified by a subscript or key, arranged so a computer can
examine the collection and retrieve data with the key.
arrowhead A terminator, such as an arrowhead, slash, or dot, at the end of a
dimension line showing where a dimension begins and ends.
associative dimension A dimension that automatically adapts as the associated geometry is
modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also
exploded dimension.
associative hatching Hatching that conforms to its bounding objects such that modifying
the bounding objects automatically adjusts the hatch. (BHATCH)
attribute definition An object that is included in a block definition to store alphanumeric
data about the block. Attribute values can be predefined or specified
when the block is inserted. Attribute data can be extracted from a
drawing and inserted into external files. (ATTDEF)
160 | Glossary
Auto-hide A palette setting that causes palettes to hide automatically when the
cursor moves off of it and to open automatically when the cursor
moves onto its title bar.
baseline dimensions Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. Also called
parallel dimensions.
base point 1. In the context of editing grips, the grip that changes to a solid
color when selected to specify the focus of the subsequent editing
operation. 2. A point for relative distance and angle when copying,
moving, and rotating objects. 3. The insertion base point of the
current drawing. (BASE) 4. The insertion base point for a block
definition. (BLOCK)
block A generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create
a single object. Commonly used for either block definition or block
reference. See also block definition and block reference. (BLOCK)
block definition The name, base point, and set of objects that are combined and
stored in the symbol table of a drawing. See also block and block
reference.
block definition table The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block
definitions.
block instance See block reference.
block reference A compound object that is inserted in a drawing and displays the
data stored in a block definition. Also called instance. See also block
and block definition. (INSERT)
B-spline curve A blended piecewise polynomial curve passing near a given set of
control points. (SPLINE)
BYBLOCK A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the
color or linetype of any block containing it. See also BYLAYER.
BYLAYER A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the
color or linetype associated with its layer. See also BYBLOCK.
command alias A shortcut for a command. For example, CP is an alias for COPY, and
Z is an alias for ZOOM. You define aliases in the PGP file.
command line A text area reserved for keyboard input, prompts, and messages.
command window A text area that displays the command line and a history of prompts
and messages.
continued dimension A type of linear dimension that uses the second extension line origin
of a selected dimension as its first extension line origin, breaking one
long dimension into shorter segments that add up to the total
measurement. Also called chain dimension. (DIMCONTINUE)
crosshairs A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect.
Term Definition
Glossary | 161
crossing selection A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its
borders. See also window selection.
cursor See crosshairs.
cursor menu See shortcut menu.
CTB file A color-dependent plot style table.
default A predefined value for a program input or parameter. Default values
and options are denoted by angle brackets (<>).
definition table The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block
definitions.
DesignCenter Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which
includes blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs).
(ADCENTER)
digital signature Identifies an individual or an organization through a digital ID
(certificate), and enables you to validate (verify the authenticity of) a
file. (SIGVALIDATE)
dimension style A named group of dimension settings that determines the
appearance of the dimension and simplifies the setting of dimension
system variables. (DIMSTYLE)
dimension text The measurement value of dimensioned objects.
dimension variables A set of numeric values, text strings, and settings that control
dimensioning features. (DIMSTYLE)
direct distance entry A method to specify a second point by first moving the cursor to
indicate direction and then entering a distance.
drawing area The area in which your drawings are displayed and modified. The
size of the drawing area varies, depending on the size of the
application window and on how many toolbars and other elements
are displayed.
drawing extents The smallest rectangle that contains all objects in a drawing,
positioned on the screen to display the largest possible view of all
objects. (ZOOM)
drawing limits See grid limits.
drawing template file A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings.
Drawing template files have a DWT extension.
drawing units The unit of measurement that is used in a drawing. Depending on
the drawing, one drawing unit may equal one inch, one millimeter,
one kilometer, one mile, or some other distance.
Term Definition
162 | Glossary
DWF For Design Web Format. A highly compressed file format that is
created from a DWG file. DWF files are easy to publish and view on
the Web. See also DWG, DWT, and DXF.
DWT For drawing template. A drawing file that contains standard settings
to be used when creating new drawings. See also DWG.
DXF For drawing interchange format. An ASCII or binary file format of an
AutoCAD drawing file for exporting drawings to other applications
or for importing drawings from other applications. See also DWF,
DWG, and DWT.
explode To disassemble a complex object, such as a block, dimension, or
polyline, into simpler objects. In the case of a block, the block
definition is unchanged. The block reference is replaced by the
components of the block. See also block, block definition, and
block reference. (EXPLODE)
extents See drawing extents.
external reference (xref) A drawing file referenced by another drawing. (XREF)
fill A solid color covering an area bounded by lines or curves. (FILL)
floating viewports See layout viewports.
font A character set, which includes letters, numbers, punctuation marks,
and symbols of a distinctive proportion and design.
freeze A setting that suppresses the display of objects on selected layers.
Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, regenerated, or plotted.
Freezing layers shortens regenerating time. See also thaw. (LAYER)
geometry All graphical objects such as lines, circles, arcs, polylines, and
dimensions. Nongraphical objects, such as linetypes, lineweights,
text styles, and layers are not considered geometry. See also named
object.
graphics area See drawing area.
graphics screen See drawing area.
grid An area covered with regularly spaced dots to aid drawing. The
spacing between grid dots is adjustable. Grid dots are not plotted.
See also grid limits. (GRID)
grid limits The user-defined rectangular boundary of the drawing area covered
by dots when the grid is turned on. Also called drawing limits.
(LIMITS)
Grip modes The editing capabilities activated when grips are displayed on an
object: stretching, moving, rotating, scaling, and mirroring.
Term Definition
Glossary | 163
grips Small squares that appear on objects you select. After selecting the
grip, you edit the object by dragging it with the pointing device
instead of entering commands.
i-drop A method by which a drawing file can be dragged from a web page
and inserted into another drawing.
Info palette Quick Help in the Info palette continually monitors the commands
in progress and displays information that is directly related to the
active command or dialog box. (ASSIST)
instance See block reference.
island An enclosed area within a hatched area.
layer A logical grouping of data that are like transparent acetate overlays
on a drawing. You can view layers individually or in combination.
(LAYER)
layout The tabbed environment in which you create and design paper
space layout viewports to be plotted. Multiple layouts can be
created for each drawing.
layout viewports Objects that are created in paper space that display views. See also
paper space. (VPORTS)
limits See grid limits.
line font See linetype.
line width See lineweight.
linetype How a line or type of curve is displayed. For example, a continuous
line has a different linetype than a dashed line. Also called line font.
(LINETYPE)
lineweight A width value that can be assigned to all graphical objects except
TrueType
®
fonts and raster images.
mirror To create a new version of an existing object by reflecting it
symmetrically with respect to a prescribed line or plane. (MIRROR)
mode A software setting or operating state.
model A two- or three-dimensional representation of an object.
model viewports A type of display that splits the drawing area into one or more
adjacent rectangular viewing areas. See also layout viewports and
viewport. (VPORTS)
model space One of the two primary spaces in which objects reside. Typically, a
geometric model is placed in a three-dimensional coordinate space
called model space. A final layout of specific views and annotations
of this model is placed in paper space. See also paper space.
(MSPACE)
Term Definition
164 | Glossary
named object Describes the various types of nongraphical information, such as
styles and definitions, stored with a drawing. Named objects include
linetypes, layers, dimension styles, text styles, block definitions,
layouts, views, and viewport configurations. Named objects are
stored in definition (symbol) tables.
node An object snap specification to locate points, dimension definition
points, and dimension text origins.
NURBS For nonuniform rational B-spline curve. A B-spline curve or surface
defined by a series of weighted control points and one or more knot
vectors. See also B-spline curve.
object One or more graphical elements, such as text, dimensions, lines,
circles, or polylines, treated as a single element for creation,
manipulation, and modification. Formerly called entity.
object properties Settings that control the appearance and geometric characteristics
of objects. Properties that are common to all objects include color,
layer, linetype, linetype scale, and 3D thickness. (PROPERTIES)
Object Snap markers A geometric symbol that is displayed when the cursor moves over
an object. See also object snap mode.
object snap menu The menu that is displayed in the drawing area at the cursor
location when you hold down SHIFT and right-click the pointing
device. Also called a shortcut menu, it is defined in the POP0 section
of aclt.mnu. See also shortcut menu.
Object Snap mode Methods for selecting commonly needed points on an object while
you create or edit a drawing. See also running object snap and
object snap override.
object snap override Turning off or changing a running Object Snap mode for input of a
single point. See also Object Snap mode and running object snap.
origin The point where coordinate axes intersect. For example, the origin
of a Cartesian coordinate system is where the X, Y, and Z axes meet
at 0,0,0.
Ortho mode Limits pointing device input to horizontal or vertical (relative to the
current snap angle and the user coordinate system). See also snap
angle and user coordinate system (UCS). (ORTHO)
page setup A method of naming and saving plot settings. See also zoom.
(PAGESETUP)
pan To shift the view of a drawing without changing magnification. See
also zoom. (PAN)
Term Definition
Glossary | 165
paper space One of two primary spaces in which objects reside. Paper space is
used for creating a finished layout for printing or plotting, as
opposed to doing drafting or design work. You design your paper
space viewports using a layout tab. Model space is used for creating
the drawing. You design your model using the Model tab. See also
model space. (PSPACE)
pick button The button on a pointing device that is used to select objects or
specify points on the screen. For example, on a two-button mouse,
the pick button is the left button.
pickbox The square cursor used to select an object in the drawing area.
plan view A view orientation from a point on the positive Z axis toward the
origin (0,0,0). (PLAN)
pline See polyline.
point 1. A location in three-dimensional space specified by X, Y, and Z
coordinate values. 2. An object consisting of a single coordinate
location. (POINT)
pointing device A device, such as a mouse or a digitizing puck, that can be used to
interact with the interface and create and edit drawing objects in
the drawing area. A pointing device usually has several buttons,
some of which may be customized to perform commands you
specify.
polar array Objects copied around a specified center point a specified number
of times. (ARRAY)
PolarSnap A precision drawing tool used to snap to incremental distances
along the polar tracking alignment path. See also polar tracking.
polar tracking A precision drawing tool that displays temporary alignment paths
defined by user-specified polar angles. See also Polar Snap.
polyline An object composed of one or more connected line segments or
circular arcs treated as a single object. Also called pline. (PLINE,
PEDIT)
plot style An object property that specifies a set of overrides for color,
dithering, gray scale, pen assignments, screening, linetype,
lineweight, endstyles, joinstyles, and fill styles. Plot styles are applied
at plot time.
plot style table A set of plot styles. Plot styles are defined in plot style tables and
apply to objects only when the plot style table is attached to a
layout or viewport.
prompt A message on the command line that asks for information or
requests action such as specifying a point.
properties See object properties.
Term Definition
166 | Glossary
properties palette Lists and changes properties of the selected object or set of objects
or, if no objects are selected, the values of default properties
common to all objects. (PROPERTIES)
purge A feature that removes unused definitions such as block definitions,
layers, and text styles from a drawing. (PURGE)
relative coordinates Coordinates specified in relation to previous coordinates.
running object snap Setting an Object Snap mode so it continues for subsequent
selections. See also Object Snap mode and object snap override.
(OSNAP)
scale 1. The proportional size of an object compared with other objects.
2. The display size of the components of noncontinuous linetypes
and hatches. 3. The apparent size of objects in a view with respect
to a drawing sheet. (SCALE, HPSCALE, LTSCALE, CELTSCALE,
ZOOM)
selection set One or more selected objects that a command can act upon at the
same time.
shortcut keys Keys and key combinations that start commands; for example,
CTRL +S saves a file. The function keys (F1, F2, and so on) are also
shortcut keys. Also known as accelerator keys.
shortcut menu The menu displayed at your cursor location when you right-click
your pointing device. The shortcut menu and the options it provides
depend on the pointer location and other conditions, such as
whether an object is selected or a command is in progress.
snap See snap angle, snap grid, snap resolution, and Polar Snap.
snap angle The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid
points according to the spacing set by Snap. Snap grid does not
necessarily correspond to the visible grid, which is controlled
separately by GRID. (SNAP)
snap grid The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid
points according to the spacing set by Snap. Snap grid does not
necessarily correspond to the visible grid, which is controlled
separately by GRID. (SNAP)
Snap mode A mode for locking a pointing device into alignment with an
invisible rectangular grid. When Snap mode is on, the screen
crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point
on the grid. The snap resolution defines the spacing of this grid. See
also Object Snap mode. (SNAP)
spline See B-spline curve and NURBS.
status bar The area at the bottom of the application window that contains
buttons controlling the mode of operation of the program and
displays the coordinates of the cursor location in the drawing area.
Term Definition
Glossary | 167
strings A sequence of text characters entered at a prompt or in a dialog
box.
STB file For plot style table file. Contains plot styles and their characteristics.
symbol A representation of an item commonly used in drawings. See block.
symbol library A collection of block definitions stored in a single drawing file. See
also block library.
symbol table See definition table and block definition table.
system variable A name similar to a command used as a mode, size, or limit. Read-
only system variables, such as DWGNAME, cannot be modified
directly by the user.
template drawing A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings such as
aclt.dwt and acltiso.dwt; however, any drawing can be used as a
template.
text style A named, saved collection of settings that determines the
appearance of text characters—for example, stretched, compressed,
oblique, mirrored, or set in a vertical column.
thaw A setting that displays previously frozen layers. See also freeze.
(LAYER)
tiled viewports See model viewports.
tool palette tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window that provide an
efficient method for organizing, sharing, and placing blocks and
hatches.
toolbar Part of the interface containing icons that represent commands.
tree view A hierarchical list that can be expanded or collapsed to control the
amount of information displayed. Tree views are available in
DesignCenter, the Purge dialog box, and the Help system.
UCS See user coordinate system (UCS).
UCS icon An icon that indicates the orientation of the UCS axes. (UCSICON)
user coordinate system
(UCS)
A user-defined coordinate system that defines the orientation of the
X, Y, and Z axes in 3D space. The UCS determines the default
placement of geometry in a drawing. See also world coordinate
system (WCS).
vertex A location where edges or polyline segments meet.
view A graphical representation of a model from a specific location
(viewpoint) in space. See also viewport. (VPOINT, DVIEW, VIEW)
viewport See model viewports and layout viewports See also view.
(VPORTS)
Term Definition
168 | Glossary
window selection A rectangular area specified in the drawing area to select multiple
objects at the same time. See also crossing selection and polygon
window selection.
xref See external reference (xref).
zoom To reduce or increase the apparent magnification of the drawing
area. (ZOOM)
Term Definition
Index
A
absolute coordinates, 76, 159
accelerator keys (shortcut keys), 166
actions, undoing, 39
Add-A-Plotter wizard, 151
aliases, command, 36, 160
aligned dimensions, 132, 142, 159
aligning text, 128
analyzing drawings, 113
angles
angle overrides, 82, 159
angular units, 159
calculating, 113
hatch patterns, 123
polar coordinates, 76
polar tracking, 81
rotation angles, 95
specifying for arcs, 70
text characters, 128
angular dimensions, 132, 134, 143, 159
angular units, 159
annotations, 134, 139, 159
architectural drawing unit format, 50
architectural templates, 49
arcs
drawing, 70
drawing polylines with, 68
filleting, 71, 96
regenerating view of, 44
areas
finding for objects, 102
selection areas, 88
arrays, 155, 159
arrowheads, 134, 140, 159
associative dimensions, 18, 134, 159
associative hatches, 121, 159
attribute definitions, 159
Autodesk DWF Viewer, 155
Auto-hide feature, 30, 36, 61, 160
AutoSnap markers, 78, 83
axes for coordinates, 76
B
B-spline curves, 160
backwards-reading text, 128
base points, 92, 95, 160
baseline dimensions, 132, 143
black-and-white plotting, 154
blank areas within hatches (islands), 122, 163
block attributes, 118
block definition tables, 160
block definitions, 160
block instances (block references), 160
block libraries, 118, 120
block references, 160
blocks, 116, 118, 160
block attributes, 118
block definition tables, 160
block definitions, 160
block references, 160
inserting, 119
moving, 120
overview, 16
sources of, 118
title blocks, 156
typical uses, 118
See also block libraries
170 | Index
bold fonts, 128
boundaries
editing, 98
extending objects, 90
hatched areas, 122
polylines, 103
text objects, 126
trim boundaries, 108
buttons, toolbar, 35
BYBLOCK property, 160
BYLAYER property, 63, 65, 66, 160
C
calculating distances, angles, or coordinates, 113
calibrating plotters, 152
callouts (leader lines), 18, 134, 139
Cancel command, 39
Cartesian coordinates, 76
center marks, 132, 138, 140
center snap, 80
centering views, 136
centerlines, 138, 140
chain dimensions (continued dimensions), 132,
143, 160
chord length, specifying for arcs, 70
circles, 38, 44, 70, 96, 105
circumscribed polygons, 69
closing polylines, 68
color-dependent plot style tables (CTB), 152, 161
colors
applying to objects, 62
assigning to layers, 6, 54, 62
color-dependent plot style tables, 152, 161
command aliases, 36, 160
command line, 36, 160
command window, 32, 36, 160
commands
aliases, 36, 160
canceling or undoing, 39
choosing, 34
dynamic prompts, 37
editing commands, 88
ending, 39
help and information, 26
options, 36
repeating, 39
starting at command line, 36
context-sensitive Help, 29
continued dimensions, 132, 143, 160
coordinates and coordinate systems
absolute and relative coordinates, 76, 159, 166
calculating delta, 113
Cartesian coordinates, 76
dynamic input and, 77
origin point, 76, 104
overview, 76
coordinates and coordinate systems (continued)
polar coordinates, 76
specifying, 12
COPY command, 86
copying
multiple copies of objects, 93
objects, 86, 92
properties to other objects, 110
corners, filleting, 96
counter-clockwise rotation, 95
crosshairs, 160
See also cursors
crossing selection areas, 88, 161
CTB files (color-dependent plot style tables), 152,
161
current layers, 54, 63
current linetypes, 64
current object scale settings, 65
cursor menus. See shortcut menus
cursors
dynamic prompts displayed by, 37
panning with, 43
pickbox cursor, 83
snapping to a grid, 74
zooming in or out with, 42
cutting edges, 90
D
DC Online tab (in DesignCenter), 120
decimals
drawing unit format, 50
rounding on screen, 51
defaults
defined, 161
property settings, 61
definition tables, 161
deleting objects, 89
delta, calculating, 113
deselecting objects, 88
Design Web Format (DWF) files, 151, 155
DesignCenter, 32, 161
accessing and inserting blocks, 16
DC Online tab, 120
hatch patterns in, 121
sources of block libraries, 118
diameter dimensions, 132, 143
diameters, 70
digital signatures, 161
dimension lines, 134
Dimension Style Manager dialog box, 140
dimension styles, 140, 161
dimension text, 134, 161
dimension variables, 161
dimensions and dimensioning
accuracy, 12
associative dimensions, 18, 134
Index | 171
dimensions and dimensioning (continued)
center marks and centerlines, 138, 140
creating, 135, 142
dimension styles, 140, 161
dimension variables, 161
editing dimensions, 142
editing properties, 62
elements of dimensions, 134
grips, 142
layers for, 135, 136
moving dimensions, 142
overview, 134
saving styles in templates, 8
scaling, 149
standards for, 141
text, 140, 161
types of, 18, 134, 142
units of measurement, 141
DIMSCALE system variable, 137
direct distance entry, 81, 93, 161
displaying
command options, 37
display scale, 136
grid, 74
Info palette, 30
layers, 55
properties, 61
Properties palette, 61
regenerating jagged display, 44
toolbars, 35
viewport properties, 150
DIST command, 86, 113
distances
calculating, 113
direct distance entry, 81, 161
measuring, 86
polar coordinates, 76
polar tracking, 81
dividing polylines, 69
docking
toolbars, 35
Drafting Settings dialog box, 75, 79
Draw toolbar, 32
drawing area, 32, 161
drawing extents, 161
drawing interchange format (DXF) files, 162
drawing limits (grid limits), 74, 162
drawing objects
arcs, 70
circles, 38, 70
filleting, 96
lines, 37, 67
overview, 10
polygons, 67, 69
polylines, 67
rectangles, 68
drawing scale. See scales and scaling
drawing templates. See templates
drawing units, 2, 49, 50, 161
Drawing Units dialog box, 51
drawings and drawing files
coordinate systems, 76
displaying entire drawings, 42
grids, 74
inserting blocks, 119
new drawings, starting, 48
panning view, 43
plotting, 153
revising, 20
revision clouds, 112
Snap mode, 74
templates, 48
touring, 56
zooming in or out, 14
drivers, printer, 151
DWF (Design Web Format) files, 151, 155, 162
DWT files. See templates
DXF files, 162
DYN button, 77
dynamic input, 77
E
editing objects
associative hatches and, 121
copying properties, 110
dimensions, 142
duplicating objects, 92
erasing objects, 89
extending objects, 90
filleting, 96
grip edit mode, 111
mirroring, 94
object boundaries, 98
offsetting copies, 94
overview, 20
precision editing, 97
properties, 61, 109
revising drawings, 20
revision clouds, 20, 112
selecting objects to edit, 88
text, 126
text styles, 128
trimming objects, 90
editing plotter configurations, 152
editing text, 126, 128
ellipses, 96
ending commands, 39
Endpoint object snap, 80, 107
endpoints, 68, 70
engineering drawing unit format, 50
entities. See objects
ERASE command, 89
erasing layout viewports, 150
ESC key, 34
EXPLODE command, 69
172 | Index
exploding objects, 69, 162
EXTEND command, 90
extending objects, 90, 100
extension lines, 134, 140
extents, drawing, 162
external references (xrefs), 162
F
FILLET command, 71, 86
filleting objects, 71, 86, 96
fills, 121, 162
fitting options for dimensions, 141
flipping objects (mirroring objects), 86, 94, 106
floating toolbars, 35
floating viewports (layout viewports), 146, 163
fonts, 128, 162
formatting
dimensions, 140
drawing units, 50
Text Formatting toolbar, 126
fractions, 50, 51
freezing layers, 55, 162
G
geometry, 162
global scale factor for linetypes, 65
graphics area of screen (drawing area), 32, 161
grid limits, 74, 162
grids, 162
creating outlines with, 83
displaying or hiding, 74
grid limits, 74, 162
overview, 74
spacing, 74
turning off and on, 74
grip modes, 162
grips, 163
block grips, 120
displaying, 88
editing dimensions, 142
editing objects, 111
grip modes, 162
viewport grips, 150
H
handles (move handles), 35
hatches and hatch patterns, 116, 121
associative hatches, 121
inserting, 121
islands within boundaries, 122
points for creating, 122
sources of, 121
height of text characters, 128
Help
command Help, 26
Help system, 24
procedural, 26, 29
Quick Help feature, 29
table of contents (Contents tab), 27
tutorials, 25
hiding
Info palette, 30
layers, 55, 63
Properties palette, 61
toolbars, 35
hook lines, 139
horizontal alignment of text, 128
horizontal dimensions, 132
I
i-drop, 163
imperial measurement drawing template files, 49
Info palette, 24, 30, 163
In-Place Text Editor, 126
inquiry commands, 113
inscribed polygons, 69
Insert dialog box, 120
inserting blocks, 119, 120, 156
instances (block references), 163
intersection snap, 80, 99
islands, 122, 163
ISO standards, 48, 121
italic fonts, 128
J
jagged display, 44
JIS standards, 48
JOIN command, 69
joining polylines, 69
K
keyboard shortcuts (shortcut keys), 166
keywords in Help system, 24
L
labels in model and paper space, 128
Layer Properties Manager, 54, 55, 63, 149
layers, 163
color assignments, 6, 54, 62
current layers, 54, 63
dimensions on, 135, 136
editing properties, 62
Index | 173
layers (continued)
freezing, 55
hiding or displaying, 55, 63, 149
Layer Properties Manager, 54, 55, 63, 149
Layers toolbar, 32, 61
linetype assignments, 6, 64
locking, 55
naming, 6
organizing drawings with, 46, 54
overview, 6, 54
plot styles, 6
properties and, 60, 62
rearranging, 54
viewports layer, 156
Layers toolbar, 32, 61
layout tab, 52
layout tabs, 32
layout viewports, 146, 163
layouts, 146, 163
compared to models, 52
display scale, 136
linetypes in, 65
overview, 4, 52
page setups and, 153
plotting from, 153
scale vs. drawing units, 2, 50
switching to model space, 53
text size and, 129
viewports, 146, 163
leader lines (callouts), 18, 134, 139
leader objects, 134
left mouse button, 34
lengthening objects, 90
libraries
block libraries, 16, 118
DesignCenter, 120
DesignCenter Online, 120
limits, grid, 74, 162
line fonts. See linetypes
line widths (lineweights), 6, 46, 66, 163
linear dimensions, 132, 134, 142
linear measurements, 50
lines
angles, 82
centerlines, 138, 140
dimension styles, 140
drawing, 37, 67
exact length, 81
extension lines on dimensions, 134
filleting, 96
hook lines, 139
leader lines, 134, 139
linetypes. See linetypes
lineweights, 6, 46, 66, 163
offsetting, 10
parallel, 67
perpendicular, 81
polylines, 67
tapering, 69
Linetype Manager, 64
linetypes, 163
editing properties, 109
global scale factor, 65
identifying objects with, 46
layer assignments, 6, 64
Linetype Manager, 64
overview, 63
saving styles in templates, 8
scaling, 64, 65
Lineweight Settings dialog box, 66
lineweights, 6, 46, 66, 163
locking
layers, 55
toolbars, 35
M
magnifying view in viewports. See zooming in or out
markup revision clouds, 112
matching properties between objects, 110
measurement units, 2, 49, 50, 141
mechanical drawing templates, 49
mechanical drawing unit format, 104
menu bar, 32
menus, 34, 35, 166
metric measurement template files, 49
midpoint snap, 80
mirroring objects, 86, 94, 106, 163
Model tab, 32, 52
model viewports, 163
models and model space, 4, 146, 163
analyzing drawings, 113
compared to layouts, 52
dimensioning and, 136
drawing in model space, 52
formulas for text size, 129
linetypes in, 65
notes and labels in, 128
scale vs. drawing units, 2, 50
switching to layouts, 53
switching to paper space, 150
text size in, 129
viewports, 163
zooming in or out, 156
modes, defined, 163
mouse devices, 34, 165
move handles on toolbars, 35
moving
blocks, 120
dimensions, 142
objects, 95
panning view, 43
rotating objects, 95
text in dimensions, 134
toolbars, 35
multiple copies of objects, 93
174 | Index
N
named layers, 6
named objects, 164
named plot style tables, 152
navigation
Help system display, 26
Info palette information, 29
New Features Workshop, 24
New Page Setup dialog box, 154
nodes, 164
nonuniform rational B-spline curves, 164
notes, in model and paper space, 128
NURBS (nonuniform rational B-spline curves), 164
O
object properties, 164
object snap markers, 164
Object Snap menu, 35, 78, 164
Object Snap mode, 164
object snap overrides, 164
object snaps
accuracy and, 12
AutoSnap markers, 83
creating outlines with, 83
cycling through snap points, 78
dimensions and, 135
markers, 164
overriding, 164
overview, 74
running object snaps, 79
snap angles, 166
snap grid, 166
Snap mode, 164, 166
spacing, 74
types of, 80
objects, 164
associative dimensions, 134
colors, 62
copying properties, 110
displaying on layers, 149
drawing, 10
duplicating, 92
editing properties, 61, 62
erasing, 89
filleting, 96
grips, 111
hatch patterns, 121
linetypes, 63
lineweights, 66
mirroring, 94
moving, 95
offsetting copies, 94
properties, 60, 109, 164
rotating, 95
selecting, 88
objects (continued)
trimming edges, 90
oblique text, 128
OFFSET command, 67, 86
offsetting objects, 10, 67, 86, 94, 105
opening
block libraries, 120
templates, 49
ordinate dimensions, 132, 134, 142
orientation
pages, 153
text, 128
origin points, 76, 104, 164
Ortho mode, 164
overlays, 6
overriding dimension styles, 140
P
page orientation, 153
Page Setup Manager, 153
page setups, 146, 153, 164
page size, 153
PAN command, 43
panning, 14, 43, 164
paper size, 152, 155
paper space, 4, 165
compared to model space, 52
notes and labels in, 128
scaling linetypes in, 65
switching to model space, 53, 150
text size and, 129
parallel dimensions (baseline dimensions), 132, 143
parallel lines, 67
PAT files, 121
PC3 files, 151
perpendicular lines, 81
perpendicular snap, 80
pick button, 34, 165
pickbox cursor, 83, 165
plan views, 165
plines. See polylines
Plot dialog box, 153
plot scales, 153
Plot Style Manager, 152
plot style tables (STB) files, 152, 165, 167
plot styles, 6, 146, 152, 165
plotter configuration (PC3) files, 151
Plotter Configuration Editor, 152
Plotter Manager, 151
plotters and plotting
calibration, 152
configuring plotters, 151
driver support for, 151
page setups, 153
plot styles, 146, 152
Plotter Configuration Editor, 152
Index | 175
plotters and plotting (continued)
plotting from layouts, 153
previewing, 153
printing viewport borders, 150
scaling in model space, 157
setting up, 153
Plotters folder, 151
pointing devices, 34, 42, 44, 165
points, 165
absolute coordinates, 76, 159
AutoSnap markers, 78, 83
calculating distance or coordinates, 113
coordinate systems. See coordinates and
coordinate systems
origin points, 76, 104, 164
polar coordinates, 76
relative coordinates, 76, 166
specifying for arcs, 70
specifying for circles, 70
polar arrays, 165
polar coordinates, 76
polar tracking, 12, 81, 165
PolarSnap, 104, 165
polygons, 67, 69
polylines, 67, 165
closing, 68
dividing or joining, 69
filleting, 96
highlighting boundaries, 103
widths, 69
ports, 152
PostScript files, 151
previewing plot areas and settings, 153
printers
calibrating, 152
plot styles and plot style tables, 152
Plotter Configuration Editor, 152
selecting plotters, 153
support for, 151
procedural Help, 26, 29
prompts, 36, 37, 165
properties, 60
assigning, 60
copying to other objects, 110
editing, 62, 109
layer assignments, 60
matching, 110
Properties palette, 61, 109, 166
Properties toolbar, 32, 61, 109
viewing, 62
Properties palette, 61, 109, 166
Properties toolbar, 32, 61
pull-down menus, 34
purging, 166
Q
Quadrant object snap, 80, 106
Quick Help feature, 29
Quick Leader dimensions, 132
Quick Reference card, 24
R
radius
filleting objects, 96
specifying for arcs, 70
specifying for circles, 70
specifying for polygons, 69
radius dimensions, 132, 134, 143
raster files, 151
raster graphics quality, 152
rectangles, 68
rectangular selection areas, 88
redline drawings, 112
regenerating jagged display, 44
relative coordinates, 76, 166
relative values, 76
removing objects, 89
repeating commands, 39, 93
resizing
linetypes, 65
text objects, 126
toolbars, 35
viewports, 150
revising drawings, 20, 112
See also editing objects
revision clouds, 20, 112
right mouse button, 34
right-clicking actions, 34
rotating objects, 95, 120
running object snap, 79, 166
S
saving
files as DWF files, 155
files in other formats, 151
scales and scaling, 166
dimensions, 137
drawing units compared to scale, 2, 50
hatch patterns, 123
linetypes, 64, 65
lineweights and, 66
overview, 2
plot scales, 153
setting display scale, 136
text, 129
views in viewports, 4
scientific drawing unit format, 50
secondary dimension styles, 140
176 | Index
Select Template dialog box, 49
selecting
deselecting objects, 88
objects, 88
selection areas, 88
selection sets, 88, 166
sharp corners on objects, 96
shortcut keys, 166
shortcut menus, 34, 35, 166
shortcuts
cycling through snap points, 78
editing text, 126
shortcut keys, 166
sizing
linetypes, 65
text objects, 126
toolbars, 35
viewports, 150
slant of text characters, 128
smoothing display, 44
Snap and snapping. See object snaps
snap angles, 166
snap grids, 166
Snap mode, 166
solid fills, 121, 162
spacing
grid and snap settings, 74
hatch patterns, 123
splines, 96, 160, 164
STANDARD style, 128, 140
Standard toolbar, 32
start points, 68, 70
starting drawings, 48
status bar, 32, 166
STB files (named plot style tables), 152, 167
strings, 167
styles
dimension styles, 140, 161
drafting standards, 8
extension lines, 140
overriding, 140
plot styles, 152
text styles, 128
Styles toolbar, 32
switching
between model space and paper space, 150
between models and layouts, 53
between page setups, 153
symbol libraries, 118, 167
DesignCenter Online, 120
opening, 120
symbols
defined, 16, 167
in dimensions, 140
See also blocks
system variables, 167
T
table of contents in Help system, 27
tangent method for drawing circles, 70, 105
tangent snap, 80
tapering lines, 69
templates, 48, 161, 167
drafting standards and, 8
DWT files, 162
opening, 49
sample files, 49
text
annotations, 134, 139
dimension text, 134, 140, 161
In-Place Text Editor, 126
model vs. paper space, 128
saving styles in templates, 8
styles, 128, 167
Text Formatting toolbar, 126
viewports and, 129
width of, 126
Text Formatting toolbar, 126
Text Style dialog box, 128
text styles, 8, 128, 167
thawing, 55, 167
tiled viewports (model viewports), 167
title blocks, 156
tolerance options for dimensions, 141
tool palettes, 32, 167
Tool Palettes window, 32
toolbar buttons, 35
toolbars, 32, 167
hiding or displaying, 35
Layers toolbar, 61
locking, 35
moving, 35
overview, 35
Properties toolbar, 61
resizing, 35
toolbars docking, 35
tooltips, 35, 78
topics in Help system display, 26
transparency of palettes, 30
tree views, 167
trim boundaries, 108
TRIM command, 86, 90
TrueType fonts, 128
tutorial drawing templates, 49
U
UCS (user coordinate system), 167
UCS icon, 167
undoing actions, 39
units of measurement
in dimensions, 141
drawing units, 2, 50
Index | 177
units of measurement (continued)
template files, 49
updating dimensions and leader lines, 134
upside-down text, 128
user coordinate system (UCS), 167
user interface elements, 32
V
variables
dimension variables, 161
system variables, 167
vector graphics quality, 152
vertical alignment of text, 128
vertical dimensions, 132
vertices, 167
viewports, 146
changing settings, 155
creating, 149
display scale, 136
displaying layered objects, 149
erasing, 150
grips, 150
linetype scaling in, 65
model space and paper space overview, 52
modifying, 149
multiple viewports, 155
overlapping, 150
overview, 4
panning, 43
plotting borders, 150
properties, 150
scaling views, 4, 42
sizing, 150
viewports (continued)
zooming in or out, 156
views, 42, 167
displaying entire drawings, 42
panning, 14, 43
repositioning, 43
See also viewports
visibility of layers, 55
W
wheel mouse, 34, 42, 44
width
polylines, 69
text characters, 128
text objects, 126
window interface elements, 32
window selection areas, 88, 168
Windows printer drivers, 151
X
X and Y values, 76
xrefs (external references), 161, 168
Z
ZOOM command, 42
zooming in or out, 168
overview, 14, 42
scaling views in viewports, 4, 156
178

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped, bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), cleaner, Codec Central, combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, IntroDV, lustre, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Physique, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, jobnet, mass, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Co. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, Multi-Master Editing.

Third-Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third-Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents
Make the Transition from Paper to CAD .
Draw to Scale . . . . . . Lay Out Your Drawing . . . Organize Drawing Information Establish Drafting Standards . Draw Efficiently . . . . . Draw Accurately . . . . . View Your Drawing . . . . Create Standard Symbols . . Create Dimensions and Text . Modify Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . . . .

.1
. 2 . 4 . 6 . 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Chapter 1

An Introduction to AutoCAD LT.

.

.

.
. . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . .

. 23
. . . . . . . 24 24 24 25 29 29 30

Why You Should Use this Guide . . . . . Get Information About AutoCAD LT . . . Access Related Topics in the Help System Tutorial: Use the Help System . . . . Use Quick Help on the Info Palette . . . . Navigate the Info Palette Content . . Control the Info Palette Display Options

Chapter 2

Work with Commands .

.

.

.

.

.

.
. . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . .

.
. . . . . . . .

. 33
. . . . . . . . 34 34 34 35 36 36 37 39

Use the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . Cancel a Command . . . . . . . . . Start a Command . . . . . . . . . Start Commands from Menus . . . . Start Commands on the Command Line Specify a Command Option . . . . Use the Dynamic Prompt . . . . . Undo or Redo Commands . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . Scale Linetypes . . . Pan by Moving the Cursor . . . Set Grid Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 . . . Assign Lineweights. . . . Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 Draw Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 . . . . . . . Draw Circles . . 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 Precision Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 50 50 50 52 54 54 55 56 Start a Drawing . . . . .Chapter 3 Change Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organize Drawings with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Polylines and Polygons . . . . . . . Draw Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Linetypes . . . . . . Set Grid and Snap Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Object Properties . . Use the Properties Palette. . Tutorial: Tour a Drawing. . 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 60 61 61 62 63 65 66 67 67 67 68 70 70 70 Object Properties Overview . . . . . . . . . . Set the Format of Drawing Units Understand Models and Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom by Moving the Cursor . . Use the Properties and Layers Toolbars Tutorial: Change Object Properties . . . . . Zoom to Display the Entire Drawing Pan to Reposition a View . . . . . . . 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom to a Specified Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plan the Drawing Units and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Parallel Lines . 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 Zoom to Magnify a View. . . . . . 75 Set Grid and Snap Values . . . . Draw Polylines . . . . iv | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Arcs . . . . . . Tutorial: Zoom and Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choose the Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . Snap to Precise Points on Objects . . . . . . . Analyze Drawings . . . . . . . . . Extend Objects . . Erase Objects . . . . . Move Objects . . . . . Tutorial: Modify Objects with Precision. and Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erase. . . Create Revision Clouds . Mirror Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents | v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . Tutorial: Create a New Drawing with Precision Match Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Running Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Objects . . . . . Use Polar Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Snap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw with Absolute Cartesian Coordinates Draw with Relative Cartesian Coordinates . 76 76 76 76 78 78 79 80 81 81 81 82 82 Chapter 7 Make Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Angles and Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move and Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . Tutorial: Draw with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Single Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillet Corners . . . Use Editing Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify an Angle . . . . 88 88 88 89 89 90 90 92 92 94 94 95 95 95 96 97 103 110 111 111 112 113 Select Objects to Edit . . . . . . . Extend. . . Copy Objects . . . . . .Draw with Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . Use Cartesian and Polar Coordinates . . . . . . . . Offset Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify a Selection Area . Edit with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 .

. . . . . . . . . . .121 . . . . . .118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tutorial: Work with Layout Viewports vi | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 8 Add Symbols and Hatches . . . Define Hatch Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . . 117 . . . . . . . .149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Work with Layouts .121 . . . Tutorial: Adding Blocks . . Tutorial: Add Hatches to a Drawing Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Dimensioning Options . . .119 .134 . . . . Create Leaders with Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . .128 . . . . . . . .148 . . Associative Hatches . . . Parts of a Dimension . . . . . . . . Overview of Hatches . . . . . Set Text Size in Model Space. . . . . . . .121 . . .139 . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 . . .142 Dimensions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . .126 .121 .149 . . . . Create Center Marks and Lines . . . . Use Standard Hatch Patterns .134 . . . . .135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Dimension Styles . . . Create and Modify Text Styles . . . Insert Hatches or Solid Fills . . Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling. . . . Tutorial: Create Dimensions . .128 . . . . . 125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Text Styles . .134 . . . . . . . . . .129 Create and Modify Text . . . .119 . . . . . .138 . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions and Leaders Create Dimensions . Sources of Blocks . . . . . . . . . 133 . . Benefits of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 10 Add Dimensions. Use Layout Viewports . . . . . .148 . . . . . .118 . . . . . Modify Dimensions . . Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . . Create a New Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . .135 . . . . .138 . . . . . . . . . .122 Overview of Blocks .122 . . . . . .118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Blocks . . . . . . . . . .

. . . 151 151 152 152 153 153 154 Glossary . . . . .Choose and Configure Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Plot Styles to Override Properties Plot from a Layout . . Tutorial: Plot a Drawing. Add a Plotter Configuration . . . . . . . . 169 Contents | vii . . Index . . . . . . . . 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change a Plotter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii .

Make the Transition from Paper to CAD .

you can specify any scale. Draw the object at 1:1 scale in the units you choose. when you draw a motor part. This drawing of a mechanical carriage uses millimeters for the length of one unit. With manual drafting. In AutoCAD LT. When you draw a map. and then draw your model at 1:1 scale. This scale compares the size of the actual object to the size of the model drawn on paper.Draw to Scale Drawing scale is something you consider when laying out your drawing. 2 | Introduction . the length of one unit might equal one millimeter or one inch. You establish scale differently in CAD than you do with manual drafting. When you lay out and plot your drawing. one unit might equal one kilometer or one mile. Views of the part were scaled later to create the layout for the printed drawing. you must determine the scale of a view before you start drawing. you first decide what units of measurement you will use. For example.

.

Finally. Layout viewports are areas. sections. general notes. and one or more views of the model displayed in layout viewports. You create your basic design. and details. title block. Then you determine the location for views—plans. which usually includes a preprinted border and title block. or model. You scale the views in viewports by zooming in or out. you can arrange different views of your model in a layout. When you draft manually. elevations. 4 | Introduction . You can then create a layout for that model in an environment called paper space. In CAD. you start to draw. It typically contains a border. in a working environment called model space. or model. layout viewports display the model in plan and elevation views. you are not limited to one particular layout or sheet size. you first draw your design. a layout is constrained by the sheet size you use. similar to picture frames or windows. When you’re ready to print. dimensions. through which you can see your model.Lay Out Your Drawing On paper. you first select a sheet. in a drawing area called model space. In this drawing of a cottage. A layout represents a drawing sheet. With AutoCAD LT.

.

sorting. you need a way to organize your drawing content—a method for separating. layers are equivalent to transparent overlays. and editing specific drawing data. This drawing of a press uses layers to define different linetypes and colors. As with overlays. linetype. Assigning a plot style to a layer makes all the objects drawn on that layer plot in a similar manner. Turn off layers to hide complex details as you work. Assigning settings such as color. edit. a building plan might contain separate overlays for its structural. Display layers when you need to see all components. You can also use layers to organize drawing objects for plotting. You can name layers to help track content. In AutoCAD LT. 6 | Introduction . or lineweight to layers helps you comply with industry standards. With manual drafting. you can display. electrical. and lock layers so they can't be altered. For example. and print layers separately or in combination.Organize Drawing Information In both manual drafting and CAD. and plumbing components. you can separate information onto individual transparent overlays.

.

With AutoCAD LT. width. This drawing of a roadway plan uses styles to maintain drafting standards for text. 8 | Introduction . and slant. Dimension. layouts. You can save styles. Using drawing templates helps you quickly start new drawings that conform to standards. text. Standards must be established in the beginning and applied consistently. and linetype styles can be established in a template drawing and used for creating new drawings. title block and border information. establishes font and format characteristics such as height. you can ensure conformity to industry or company standards by creating styles that you can apply consistently. and linetypes. and some command settings in drawing template files. text. You can create styles for text. A text style.Establish Drafting Standards Whether you work as a member of a team or on an individual project. Manual drafting requires meticulous accuracy in drawing linetypes. for example. developing standards is a requirement for efficient communication. and linetypes. and more. dimensions. lineweights. dimensions. dimensioning. layers.

.

With manual drafting. You can also copy objects between open drawings. and mirror objects. spline curves. AutoCAD LT has a complete set of drawing and editing tools to help eliminate repetitive.Draw Efficiently Draw with less effort and revise with more speed: these are the two main reasons you use CAD. You can easily move. you use drawing tools that include pencils. 10 | Introduction . You can save drafting time by drawing one half of an item and then mirroring it to create the other half. circles. parallel rules. In this drawing of a trolley. templates. scales. and more. copy. copying and mirroring were used to create repeated and symmetrical features. compasses. Repetitive drawing and editing tasks must be done manually. you can choose from a variety of drawing tools that create lines. and erasers. offset. Offsetting was also used to draw parallel lines more efficiently. In AutoCAD LT. rotate. timeconsuming drafting tasks.

.

With object snaps. Polar tracking was used to draw lines at correct angles. you can use several methods to obtain exact dimensions. or the center point of a circle. 12 | Introduction . the midpoint of a line. you can snap to the center point automatically. With polar tracking. you draft more accurately than with manual methods. In AutoCAD LT. you can snap to locations on existing objects. when you place your cursor here… On paper. object snaps were used to ensure that lines connected perfectly. The simplest method is to locate points by snapping to an interval on a rectangular grid. With object snaps. Objects drawn to scale must be manually verified and dimensioned. With CAD.Draw Accurately Engineering and architectural drawings require a high degree of accuracy. Another method is to specify exact coordinates. The polar tracking feature displays visual guidelines at specific angles and can snap the cursor to an angle. In this drawing of a pumping station. such as an endpoint of an arc. Coordinates specify a drawing location by indicating a point along an X and Y axis or a distance and angle from another point. you can snap to previously set angles and specify distances along those angles. you must draw objects carefully to ensure correct size and alignment.

.

You can zoom out to see more of your design. When you draft on paper. To move to another section of a drawing. You can zoom and pan to create the best working conditions. You can pan to shift to another area of your design. or zoom in to see more detail. such as this health spa plan. you pan the drawing without changing magnification. you can increase display size by zooming in. 14 | Introduction . To do detailed work.View Your Drawing The power of CAD makes it easy for you to quickly view different parts of your design at different magnifications. the size and resolution of your drawing is fixed. In CAD. the size and resolution of your drawing can be changed as needed. This can be invaluable when working on large and detailed drawings. You can zoom out to display more of the drawing.

.

you might use a symbol template or printed stickers to draw repetitive landscape. The ability to create and reuse standard symbols is one of CAD’s greatest strengths. at any rotation or scale. When you need to create a custom symbol. With manual drafting. Standard landscaping symbols are used extensively in this drawing of a residential landscaping plan. or on a website. 16 | Introduction . You can browse and preview blocks from drawings stored on your computer. This method.Create Standard Symbols Symbols have long been used in manual drafting as a way to represent real-world objects in a simplified way. DesignCenter helps you locate libraries (collections) of blocks that you can drag onto your drawing or onto a tool palette. you combine several objects into a single object called a block. however. architectural. on a company network. you can save time by inserting copies of existing symbols anywhere in your drawing. or electrical symbols. You then can insert the block as many times as needed into any drawing using DesignCenter. limits the possible variations of a symbol. In CAD. mechanical.

.

and dimensions describe the required hardware. If you make dimensions associative. you must erase and then redraw the dimensions. When you work on paper.Create Dimensions and Text Creating accurate dimensions and consistent. legible text is a time-consuming task for the manual drafter. Associative dimensions are tied to the underlying model. the leader is adjusted automatically. the text. If you move the text. 18 | Introduction . Changing text can often involve relettering the whole drawing. In this detail drawing of a gutter. and rotation of text in dimensions and notes. In AutoCAD LT. radial. You can create leader lines with associated text. Standard types of dimensions in AutoCAD LT include linear. ordinate. angular. font. You can easily revise the content. spacing. size. if you resize any part of the drawing. CAD provides ways to streamline this task. Changes to the model automatically update the dimension values. you create associative dimensions and text on the layout in paper space. you can update the dimension size and value automatically when you stretch or scale the dimensioned object. baseline. and more. leaders.

.

Whether you work on paper or with CAD. you can easily copy it without having to re-create it. you will need to modify your drawing in some way. you never need to redraw it. And if you make an error. and layer. rotating. you can quickly undo your actions. The revision cloud feature is used to mark areas of change. You can also change object properties. you don’t have to redraw it. trimming. color. AutoCAD LT eliminates tedious manual editing by providing a variety of editing tools. you can erase it with a few clicks of the mouse. These before-and-after drawings show some typical edits to a house elevation. On paper you must erase and redraw to make revisions to your drawing manually. such as linetype. You can modify existing objects by mirroring. at any time. 20 | Introduction . and more. lineweight. Once you draw something. If you need to copy all or part of an object. scaling. If you need to remove an object. Once you draw an object. stretching.Modify Your Drawing Revisions are a part of any drawing project.

.

22 .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .An Introduction to AutoCAD LT Why You Should Use this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Navigate the Info Palette Content. . 24 Access Related Topics in the Help System . . . . . . 25 Use Quick Help on the Info Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tutorial: Use the Help System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Get Information About AutoCAD LT . . . . . 29 Control the Info Palette Display Options . . .

and command descriptions. AutoCAD LT has a rich set of features and there are often many ways of accomplishing a task. Use it to learn the basic features so you can begin working quickly. You can also press F1 at the Command prompt. commands. procedures. ■ New Features Workshop provides a series of overviews about new features. 24 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT . Get Information About AutoCAD LT Additional resources are available when you need more information. Access Related Topics in the Help System Keyword references are displayed at the end of most Getting Started topics. ■ Additional Online Resources provides several options for additional help from the Web. From the Help menu. or at a prompt within a command to display Help information. Then follow the steps in the illustration.Why You Should Use this Guide This Getting Started guide provides an introduction to the most commonly used features of AutoCAD LT. command aliases. you will find your own ways of working efficiently based on the type of work that you do. shortcut keys. system variables. you can access the following resources: ■ Help provides procedures. and system variables related to LAYOUT by entering layout in the Index tab of the Help window. For example. This guide focuses on the following: ■ What do you need to know to get started? ■ What is the recommended method for using the features presented? After you become more familiar with AutoCAD LT. the following information indicates that you can find concepts. Help system LAYOUT Try it: Locate a Help topic using a keyword ■ Start AutoCAD LT and press the F1 key. NOTE The Quick Reference card at the end of this guide provides an easy-to-use graphical key to the product interface. ■ Info Palette automatically displays procedures that are relevent to the active command. conceptual information. and basic operations such as selecting objects. you might want to ask for help. If the settings have been customized. toolbars. NOTE The tutorials in this guide assume that you are is using the default settings of AutoCAD LT for display and behavior. in a dialog box.

NOTE It is important to learn how to use the Help system effectively. The Help system can provide answers that keep you from needless frustration. 1 Start AutoCAD LT and press F1 to display the Help window. Get Information About AutoCAD LT | 25 .4 Click to display a concept related to the selected topic 5 Click to list procedures related to the selected topic 6 Click to list commands related to the selected topic 1 Click the Index tab 2 Enter a keyword 3 Doubleclick to view a topic Tutorial: Use the Help System In this tutorial. click the Contents tab if necessary to display the table of contents. you will use the Help system to find information about how to start a drawing with a template file and how to create a layout. The User’s Guide expands to display a list of chapters. Then click the plus sign (+) next to User’s Guide. 2 In the left pane of the Help window.

Organize. 5 Click the Procedures tab.3 In the left pane. The Commands tab lists all commands and system variables that are associated with this topic. The right pane of the Help window displays links to several topics. click directly on the title. and Save a Drawing. 6 Click the Commands tab. Notice that the table of contents in the left pane displays the topic structure for easy navigation. Then click the first procedure on the list. If you click a link on this tab. Click the Procedures tab to redisplay the list. Then click Use a Template File to Start a Drawing. and provides details about command and dialog box options. click Start a Drawing. the Command Reference is opened in Help. with descriptions for each one. 26 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT . Start. 4 In the right pane. You have navigated to a destination topic in the Help system.

click the column labeled Location to sort the list of topics by book: Command Reference. Use this method to find related topics easily. click the Concepts tab in the right pane.7 Next. A large number of topics that contain the word layout are displayed. Get Information About AutoCAD LT | 27 . click the Search tab. You will now locate topics that contain the word layout. in the left pane. 9 Click the column labeled Title to sort the list of topics alphabetically. Work on a Layout Tab-Concepts. User’s Guide. related topic? 11 In the left pane. Then. 10 Scroll down to find the User’s Guide topic. But how do you know where you are in the table of contents? How can you display an adjacent. and so on. click the Contents tab. Note If the table of contents does not automatically open to the current topic. The table of contents opens to the current topic. The topic is displayed. Then click Display (or double-click the topic). 8 Type the word layout and press ENTER or click List Topics. Customization Guide.

In the Help system. 28 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT . This is a quick method for collapsing the table of contents when too many subtopics are displayed. read Use the Help System Efficiently. For more information. 13 Close the Help window. right-click any topic and then click Close All. click User’s Guide ➤ Find the Information You Need ➤ Use the Help System Efficiently. on the Contents tab.12 In the left pane.

Quick Help displays a list of procedures that are relevent to the current command. display reference information title bar choose a procedure right-click in the palette or on the title bar to display a shortcut menu Often. You can click on a procedure to display it in the palette. however. the guidance you get from Quick Help is just enough to get you started performing unfamiliar or rarely used tasks. During most activities. Use these commands to move forward and backward through viewed topics or return to Home in the Info palette. Usually.Use Quick Help on the Info Palette Quick Help on the Info palette provides convenient access to procedures in the Help system. Use Quick Help on the Info Palette | 29 . You can click the title banner at the top of the Info palette to display a list of all commands and system variables in the product. as you would in a web browser. Navigate the Info Palette Content You can right-click in the Info palette to display a shortcut menu with navigation commands. the Quick Help information is updated as you start new commands. you can lock the Info palette. if you need to freeze the information so it doesn’t change as you change commands.

NOTE The title bar can appear on either the left side or right side of the palette. when would you use the Contents tab rather than the Index tab? 3 From what menu can you get information about new features in AutoCAD LT? 30 | Chapter 1 An Introduction to AutoCAD LT . ASSIST Review and Recall 1 What is the purpose of the tabs in the right pane of the Help window? 2 In the left pane of the Help window. The Info palette can be made transparent so it does not obscure objects under it.Control the Info Palette Display Options You can access the options and settings for the Info palette from the shortcut menu displayed when you right-click the title bar of the Info palette. To get started Action Access the Help system Use New Features Workshop Find training resources Use Quick Help on the Info palette Print a Quick Help procedure Lock a Quick Help procedure Menu Help ➤ Help Help ➤ New Features Workshop Help ➤ Additional Online Resources ➤ Training Help ➤ Info Palette Right-click for shortcut menu Right-click for shortcut menu Toolbar Standard Help system HELP. These settings include ■ Auto-hide. The Info palette can automatically roll open or roll away when your cursor moves over the title bar of the Info palette. depending on where the palette is dragged. ■ Transparency.

.

Standard toolbar Contains buttons for standard operations. and plot style properties. options. Status bar Indicates coordinate values and the status of drawing aids. and command history. . Model and layout tabs Provide two working environments. Command window Displays commands in progress. Styles toolbar Displays and controls text settings. Use to locate and place drawing content into drawings and onto tool palettes. Tool Palettes window (can be docked or floating). DesignCenter (can be docked or floating). lineweight. Properties toolbar Displays and controls color.Menu bar Provides menu access to all commands. Use to drag frequently used blocks and hatches into drawings. Draw toolbar Contains buttons that create new objects. Drawing area The area of the AutoCAD LT window where you create and edit drawings. Layers toolbar Displays and controls layer settings. linetype.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Start a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Start Commands from Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Specify a Command Option. . . . . . 35 Start Commands on the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Cancel a Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Use the Dynamic Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Undo or Redo Commands . . . . . . . . . . .Work with Commands Use the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

or start a command. You can choose commands from several different kinds of menus in AutoCAD LT: ■ Pull-down menus are available from the menu bar at the top of the AutoCAD LT window. It is highly recommended that you use a wheel mouse. Cancel a Command If you accidentally click in the screen. Press ESC to cancel. used to specify points or select objects in the drawing area. With the right button. a toolbar. Try it: Cancel a selection ■ Click in the drawing area and move the mouse. try right-clicking to display a shortcut menu. Start a Command You can start a command using a menu. you can always escape by pressing the ESC key on your keyboard. 34 | Chapter 2 Work with Commands .Use the Mouse Most people use a mouse as their pointing device. This wheel can be rotated or pressed down to zoom and pan your drawing quickly. AutoCAD LT is in a selection mode. or the command line. display a shortcut menu. All the commands for the tutorials in this book are accessible from these menus. the left button is usually the pick button. you can display a shortcut menu that contains relevant commands and options. On a two-button mouse. you can work in the way that feels most comfortable to you. specify points or select objects display a shortcut menu NOTE To see what options are available in any situation. A wheel mouse is a two-button mouse with a small wheel between the buttons. a palette. Different shortcut menus are displayed depending on where you move the cursor. Because AutoCAD LT is very flexible.

and Lock Toolbars ■ You can display or hide toolbars by right-clicking any toolbar and. ■ Shortcut menus are displayed when you click the right mouse button. where it changes into an up-down cursor. right-click in the drawing area. 3 Move the cursor to the bottom of the Draw toolbar. a tooltip displays its name. and then release the mouse button. Display. Try it: Resize and position the Draw toolbar In this tutorial. 2 On the left side of the application window. palette. ■ You can dock a floating toolbar by clicking its title bar and dragging it to an edge of the drawing area. Resize. close any open palettes in the drawing area by clicking the [x] in their title bars. or right-click within a dialog box. Object snaps facilitate precision drawing by snapping the cursor onto a feature on an object such as the endpoint of a line or the center of a circle.” click and hold down the left mouse button. ■ You can float a docked toolbar by clicking its move handle and dragging it anywhere in the drawing area.■ The Object Snap menu is displayed when you hold down SHIFT and click the right mouse button. You can easily redisplay the Draw toolbar or any other toolbar. ■ You can lock toolbars in place using the same shortcut menu and clicking one of the Lock options at the bottom of the menu. 5 Click the [x] in the upper-right corner of the Draw toolbar to close it. or window. When you move the pointing device over a button. Press the CTRL key to prevent docking. Start a Command | 35 . drag the move handle on the Draw toolbar to the center of the drawing area. ■ You can resize a floating toolbar by dragging any edge. Start Commands from Menus Toolbars contain buttons that start commands. on the shortcut menu. 4 Drag the bottom of the Draw toolbar to change its shape. right-click a toolbar. clicking the toolbar that you want to display or hide. 1 To make space. move handle Hide. and Float Toolbars A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. Dock. NOTE When you are instructed to “drag. resizing. move the cursor. you can practice moving. Different menus are displayed when you right-click an object. and docking the Draw toolbar.

regardless of how they are started. If you drag the toolbar behind the Microsoft Windows taskbar at the bottom of your screen. 7 Drag the title bar of the Draw toolbar to the left edge of the application window. it may be hard to find.6 Right-click any toolbar to display a shortcut menu that contains a list of toolbars. ■ To choose a different option. release the left mouse button to dock the toolbar. or use the pointing device to click a center point in the drawing area. but a sliver of the toolbar will be visible and you can drag it back. You can also repeat the previous command by pressing ENTER or SPACEBAR. When the toolbar outline changes shape. command window command line Some commands have abbreviated names or command aliases. type the boldface value on the command line. enter the capitalized letters in the option name.” is displayed before the square brackets. For example. when you are instructed to enter something. click Draw to redisplay the Draw toolbar. you need to set the Windows taskbar properties to “Auto-hide” to retrieve the toolbar. and then press the ENTER key. you can enter c as an alias for CIRCLE. type 2P and press ENTER to choose the Two-Point option. 36 | Chapter 2 Work with Commands . Alternate options are displayed between the aquare brackets. ■ To accept the default option. when you enter the CIRCLE command. “Specify center point for circle. Specify a Command Option When you start a command. Start Commands on the Command Line You can initiate AutoCAD LT commands by typing them on the command line within the command window instead of using toolbars or menus. NOTE In this guide and in the Help system. press ENTER or SPACEBAR to execute the command. For example. For example. the following prompt is displayed on the command line: Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: The default option. AutoCAD LT often displays a set of options on the command line. After you type the command on the command line. enter coordinate values. See the Quick Reference card at the back of this guide for more information. some commands must be completed on the command line. On the shortcut menu. Additionally. NOTE If you move a toolbar past the edge of your screen.

With the dynamic prompt. In future steps. 4 Create a second line segment by clicking again to locate another point. Start a Command | 37 . 5 Press ENTER to end the LINE command. and click each line. click anywhere else in the drawing area to specify the endpoint of the line segment. you can keep your eyes on your work and you don’t have to look down to the command line. 2 Draw two line segments. a similar prompt is displayed next to the cursor called the dynamic prompt. 3 At the Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt. The Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt is repeated so you can continue to draw segments until you end the LINE command. this is abbreviated Click Draw menu ➤ Line. The two line segments that you just created share an endpoint. press the DOWN ARROW key. click the Draw menu and then click Line. Try it: Use a menu to draw a line 1 On the menu bar. 2 At the Specify First Point prompt. but are separate objects. To display command options in the dynamic input prompt. click anywhere in the drawing area to locate a point. 6 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase. Try it: Use a button on a toolbar to draw a line 1 On the Draw toolbar. Then press ENTER to execute the erase command. and then click an option on the menu. click the Line button. which is located on the left edge of the application window.Use the Dynamic Prompt In addition to the prompt on the command line. The prompt changes: Specify Next Point or [Undo].

Try it: Use the command line to draw a circle 1 On the command line. enter 5 (type 5 and press ENTER). 2 Click anywhere in the drawing area to locate a point. click the Erase button. Try it: Use the command line to draw a line 1 On the command line. press the DOWN ARROW key. 5 Type u and press ENTER to undo the last line segment and click another location for the endpoint.3 On the Modify toolbar. and click each circle to select it. 2 At the Specify Center Point for Circle prompt. 4 At the Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt. 3 Click one of the CIRCLE options on the menu and complete the command. enter erase or e. enter circle or the letter c. type line or the letter L. Press ENTER. On the command line. Repeat the CIRCLE command several more times. 3 At the Specify Next Point or [Undo] prompt. 4 Click each line and then press ENTER to erase the lines. using each of the other options. 3 4 5 6 7 8 At the Specify Radius of Circle prompt. enter circle or the letter c (type c and press ENTER). Enter 2P to create a circle using two points (type 2P and press ENTER). which is located on the right edge of the application window. click anywhere else in the drawing area to specify the endpoint of the line segment. click anywhere else in the drawing area to specify the endpoint of the line segment. 2 At the Specify Center Point for Circle prompt. click anywhere in the drawing area to locate a point. Click anywhere in the drawing to locate each point. 38 | Chapter 2 Work with Commands . Use the dynamic prompt to draw a circle 1 At the dynamic prompt. Then press ENTER to erase the selected circles. When you’re done. 6 Then type c (Close) and press ENTER to add a third line segment that connects to the initial point and ends the command. press ENTER to repeat the CIRCLE command.

For example. UNDO. click Undo to delete an object that you just created. You can use the Undo and Redo lists to reverse more than one action at a time. You can backtrack previous actions. U. click Redo to re-create the object that you just undid. For example. ■ Redo.Undo or Redo Commands Occasionally you will need to undo some of your work. REDO Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 What can you do to display a list of all available toolbars? What are three ways that you can start a command? What other key can you use to end or repeat a command in addition to ENTER? What should you do to cancel a command? Undo or Redo Commands | 39 . Click the Undo or Redo list arrow and then click to select the actions. You can reinstate the actions that you backtracked with Undo. Undo list Redo list ■ Undo. To get started Action End a command Repeat a command Cancel a command Undo the previous command Menu Right-click ➤ Enter Right-click ➤ Repeat Right-click ➤ Cancel Edit ➤ Undo <action> Keyboard ENTER or SPACEBAR ENTER or SPACEBAR ESC U and press ENTER Help system OPTIONS. Two Standard toolbar buttons reverse mistakes in your drawings.

Once you have zoomed in. . you can zoom out to get a better overall view. After you finish working on an area. you can pan the view to center the objects you are working on.It will be easier to create or modify objects in this drawing by zooming in to magnify the view.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Pan by Moving the Cursor . . 42 Zoom by Moving the Cursor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Zoom to Display the Entire Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Tutorial: Zoom and Pan. . . . . . . . .Change Views Zoom to Magnify a View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Pan to Reposition a View . . . 42 Zoom to a Specified Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

drag it down to zoom out. With the Realtime option of the ZOOM command. The area you define is centered in the new view. This option is also useful if your drawing area is blank as a result of zooming in too close on a blank area or panning too far off the drawing area. This is useful when you need to return to an overall view quickly. zoomed out zoomed in Zoom to Display the Entire Drawing Use the Extents option of the ZOOM command to display the entire drawing. position. to zoom in or out by moving the cursor.Zoom to Magnify a View A view is a specific magnification. you can quickly zoom in on a specific area by using the mouse to define a rectangular zoom window. AutoCAD LT provides several methods for zooming in your drawings. If you use a wheel mouse. rotate the top of the wheel forward to zoom in and rotate it backward to zoom out. Zooming increases or decreases the magnification of the image displayed in the drawing area. you drag the cursor up to zoom in. Zoom to a Specified Area With the Window option of the ZOOM command. and orientation of your design. 42 | Chapter 3 Change Views . Zoom by Moving the Cursor You can use a pointing device to zoom in real time—that is. The most common way to change a view is zooming.

Panning moves the position of the image displayed in any two-dimensional direction. 2 In the Open dialog box. 6 Drag the cursor in any direction to reposition the view. 5 Click View menu ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime. drag the cursor to pan the image to a new location. Click on each drawing file and open one that looks interesting. hold the wheel down and move the mouse to pan.Pan to Reposition a View Panning is another common way to change a view. If you use a wheel mouse. 7 Continue to practice zooming and panning with these options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Zoom Realtime (drag the cursor up and down. Tutorial: Zoom and Pan In this tutorial. use the pointing device to reposition the image in the drawing area. find the /Sample folder in the AutoCAD LT product folder. you can practice zooming and panning operations using the commands on the View menu or directly with a wheel mouse. Press ESC to end the operation. 4 Click somewhere near the center of the drawing. Within the PAN command. Move your cursor to form a rectangular area and click again. before PAN after PAN Pan by Moving the Cursor You can pan in real time—that is. press ESC to end. 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Window.) Zoom Previous Zoom Window Zoom Extents Pan Realtime Pan to Reposition a View | 43 . 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

Try the following operations: ■ Move your cursor to an area in the drawing and rotate the wheel forward and backward to zoom in and out. ■ Press the wheel down and drag the view to pan it. Note If you zoom in and you notice that arcs and circles lose their smoothness.Practice these options until you are comfortable with zooming and panning. This command also removes stray pixels. Click View menu ➤ Regen All. To get started Action Pan Zoom Reset the display limit for zooming Smooth arcs and circles Menu View ➤ Pan View ➤ Zoom View ➤ Regen View ➤ Regen Toolbar Standard Standard Help system PAN. 9 Close the sample drawing without saving it. ■ Double-click the wheel to zoom to the extents of the drawing. or if you can’t zoom in or out beyond a limit. you can zoom and pan without entering a command. 8 (Optional) If you have a wheel mouse. ZOOM. These are the most common options for drawing in 2D. REGEN Review and Recall 1 What ZOOM option should you use to fit your entire drawing into the drawing area? 2 What is a fast way to redisplay the previous view? 3 What command smooths the display of curves and removes stray pixels? 44 | Chapter 3 Change Views . Notice that your cursor location determines the stationary reference point of your zoom operation. you can regenerate the display.

.

Establish layers to organize information as if on transparent drawing overlays. Use various linetypes to help identify different types of objects. . Assign standard lineweights to ensure that lines will plot the same way regardless of drawing scale.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Plan the Drawing Units and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Control Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Tutorial: Tour a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Assign Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drawing Setup Start a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Choose the Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Set the Format of Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Understand Models and Layouts . . . . 52 Organize Drawings with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

and logos Dimension styles Text styles Linetypes and lineweights Plot styles drawing template file saved with title block Your AutoCAD LT installation folder includes many drawing template files. borders. DIN. and JIS standards. or build your own drawing template files to meet your standards and requirements. Drawing template files include settings and basic drawing elements that you will use often. such as ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Unit type and precision Tool settings and preferences Layer organization Title blocks. 48 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . ISO. including some that facilitate compliance with ANSI. A drawing template file contains predefined settings. Nevertheless. these settings are passed on to the new drawing. You can create a drawing template file by saving a drawing using the .dwt extension.Start a Drawing AutoCAD LT offers several ways to start a new drawing. it is very likely that you will customize one or more of these. When you start a drawing with a drawing template. and definitions that will save you significant setup time. standards. The recommended method is to start with a drawing template file.

Sample architectural template (metric) Tutorial-mMfg. click one of the following drawing template files and then click Open.dwt.dwt. Start a Drawing | 49 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Tutorial-mArch.Try it: Open a drawing template file 1 Click File menu ➤ New. Sample mechanical design template (metric) Tutorial-iArch. Sample mechanical design template (imperial) The metric template files are scaled to use millimeters as the drawing unit. 2 In the Select Template dialog box. Sample architectural template (imperial) Tutorial-iMfg.dwt. and the imperial template files are scaled to use inches as the drawing unit.dwt.

or one mile. one drawing unit may equal one inch. before you start a drawing. distances are measured in drawing units.5 units displays as 1. Even though you eventually print or plot to paper at a specified scale.5 units displays as 1’-3 1/2” Decimal. one millimeter. A length of 15.5000E+1 For example.Plan the Drawing Units and Scale In AutoCAD LT. if you are a mechanical engineer or architect who normally works in millimeters. A length of 15. you can set the format of the drawing units.5 units displays as 1’-3. The format settings available for linear units are as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Architectural. you must first decide what drawing units you will use. one meter. Set the Format of Drawing Units After you decide what drawing units to use. A length of 15.5 units displays as 15 1/2 Scientific.5000 Engineering. you would set the format to architectural. you would set the format for linear units to decimal. you decide what one drawing unit will represent—there is no setting in AutoCAD LT that determines the length of a drawing unit. Choose the Drawing Units In AutoCAD LT. Shaft 1 unit = 1 mm (grid spacing = 2 mm) Office plan 1 unit = 1 inch (grid spacing = 12 inches) Before you begin drawing.5 units displays as 15. you create the model in AutoCAD LT at 1:1 scale. A length of 15. you don’t need to worry about setting a scale before you start drawing. However. 50 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . A length of 15. If you are an architect who normally works in feet and inches.5” Fractional. In a drawing.

Try it: Check the drawing unit format and precision 1 Click Format menu ➤ Units. 3 Close the dialog box. Note Think of this dialog box as the Drawing Units Format dialog box. such as in the display of coordinates and values in the Properties palette. 2 Notice the value displayed under Precision. dialog boxes.The drawing unit format controls only the display style of the drawing units on-screen. and prompts. This represents the decimal or fractional rounding of values displayed on-screen. Plan the Drawing Units and Scale | 51 . In the Drawing Units dialog box. notice the display style selected for linear and for angular units.

Working on the Model tab. ■ Layout tabs access drawing layouts. you specify the paper size you want to use. Then you draw at 1:1 scale. or some other drawing unit. When you set up a layout. layout with viewports using different scales 52 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . The layout represents a printed drawing sheet in which you can display one or more views of the model at various scales. you draw a full-size model of your subject. full-size model of a part created at 1:1 scale layout with title block and rectangular layout viewports that contain scaled views ■ The Model tab accesses a limitless drawing area. you first decide whether one unit represents one millimeter.Understand Models and Layouts AutoCAD LT provides two parallel working environments represented by the Model and layout tabs. one inch. you set the drawing unit format. On the layout tabs. In model space. This layout environment is called paper space. Each layout viewport can contain a different view of the model. Here you create layout viewports that act as windows into model space. you can arrange multiple “snapshots” of the model. one meter. Next.

This is how you will later access model space to pan the model space view and to add dimensions. the blue rectangle. double-click anywhere within the rectangular viewport area. This is where you create and modify the geometry for your model. This returns you to paper space. 2 Click the layout tab to the right of the Model tab. 4 Double-click in a blank area outside the rectangular viewport. The border of the layout viewport is no longer as thick and the crosshairs cursor is active within the entire drawing area.Try it: Switch between the Model and layout tabs 1 At the bottom-left of the display area. Notice that the border of the layout viewport becomes thicker and the crosshairs cursor is active only within the layout viewport. Understand Models and Layouts | 53 . click the Model tab. 3 On the layout tab. The layout has already been prepared. including a sample title block and a layout viewport.

you can create a layer called Electrical and assign it the color green. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager. and maintainable over time. you switch to that layer. linetype. Try it: Display the list of layers in a drawing 1 Click Format menu ➤ Layer. Layer standards are essential for team projects. notice the name and default properties assigned to each layer. Review the descriptions of each layer in the column on the far right. and Name columns to rearrange the order of the layers. including those specified in companies and those recommended by professional organizations. Click the titles of the Status. 3 Enlarge the right side of the dialog box to display all of the columns. linetype. For example. The objects you draw are created on the Electrical layer and are colored green. Before you create objects. This is called the current layer. Color. Later. compatible. if you don’t want to view or plot electrical objects. consistent. There are many layer standards already in use. With a layer standard.Organize Drawings with Layers Layers are the equivalent of the overlays used in manual drafting. Assign Layers You can organize the drawing by assigning similar components to the same layer. walls electrical furniture all layers NOTE It is very important to establish a company-wide layer standard. drawing organization will be more logical. By default. Each layer includes an assigned color. and lineweight automatically to the new objects you create. AutoCAD LT assigns the current layer’s color. 54 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . They are an important organizational tool in AutoCAD LT. and lineweight. you set the layer on which the objects are to be created. These layers are just a sample of the types of layers that you will need to use in a well-organized drawing. Whenever you draw electrical objects. you can turn off that layer.

Thawing a frozen layer causes an automatic regeneration of the drawing and is slower than turning a layer on. For example. Organize Drawings with Layers | 55 . you can turn off the layer or freeze it in the Layer Properties Manager. Use this option rather than freezing if you frequently need to switch a layer’s visibility.Control Layers To make objects on a layer invisible. ■ Freeze layers. Use this option to prevent objects on a layer from being modified. You can still use the objects on a locked layer for operations that don’t modify the objects. You can also lock layers to reduce the possibility of modifying objects accidentally. ■ Turn off layers. Use this option if you don’t need a layer to be visible for a long time. you can snap to these objects to use them as guides for precision drawing. ■ Lock layers.

notice that the objects are automatically highlighted. 7 Click the ANSI C Layout tab. 6 Perform a Zoom Extents to display the entire design. To get started Action Start a new drawing Save a drawing template Set the display style of the units Create a layout Create and modify layers Menu File ➤ New File ➤ Save As Format ➤ Units File ➤ Page Setup Format ➤ Layer Layers Toolbar Standard Standard 56 | Chapter 4 Drawing Setup . 13 Click the Color column to arrange the layers according to color. 4 As you move the mouse over the objects in the drawing. 10 Click Format menu ➤ Layer. 9 Perform a Zoom Extents to display the entire layout. 14 Click the Name column and click OK. 11 Click several lightbulb icons to turn off several layers. 3 Click the Model tab. In the Layer Properties Manager.dwg. 15 Close the drawing without saving it. find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT installation folder and open arbor. review the list of layers that were created to organize this drawing. 12 Click the column labeled On to arrange the layers according to whether they are on or off. you tour a drawing of an arbor and picket fence design. Notice that the current layer has a green check next to it. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 Zoom and pan in paper space to inspect the drawing layout. 5 Zoom and pan in model space to inspect the arbor design.Tutorial: Tour a Drawing In this tutorial. 2 In the Select File dialog box. Then turn the layers back on.

MODEL. UNITS. LAYER Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 Why is it important to start a drawing from a drawing template file? What is the difference between choosing drawing units and setting the drawing unit format? What is the difference between the Model tab and a layout tab? What are several benefits to creating a drawing with layers? Tutorial: Tour a Drawing | 57 . SAVEAS.Help system NEW. STARTUP. LAYOUT.

non-uniform curves .Offset lines to create parallel lines Create rectangles easily Use polylines to combine line and arc segments Use circles and arcs to create regular curves Use lines for drawing objects and for construction geometry Use splines to create smooth.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Use Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Draw Polylines . . . . . . . 60 Use the Properties Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Scale Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Tutorial: Change Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Draw Objects Object Properties Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Assign Object Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Draw Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Create Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Draw Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Draw Polylines and Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Use the Properties and Layers Toolbars. . . . . . . 65 Assign Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Draw Circles . . . . .

View a description of the selected property. Object properties are settings that control the appearance and geometric characteristics of an object. ■ Individual properties. you assign object properties using one of the following strategies: ■ By layer. Objects that are drawn on that layer automatically use those properties. Properties are assigned to a layer. All other object properties are specific to the type of object. The general properties that are common to all objects are listed below. 60 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects .Object Properties Overview All objects created in AutoCAD LT have properties. Properties are assigned to objects individually. regardless of the layer that they are drawn on. Color Layer Linetype Linetype scale Plot style Thickness Hyperlink Lineweight Assign Object Properties Typically. Right-click to set palette behavior options. Click the icon to expand or collapse a category of properties. Click to change a property.

Leave the Properties palette open. 2 Move the cursor on and off the Properties palette. Linetype control Lineweight control Plotstyle control Object Properties Overview | 61 . ■ If you click multiple objects. You can turn on Auto-hide to make the Properties palette appear and disappear when your cursor moves over the Properties palette title bar. The Layer control provides a quick method for changing several layer properties and for changing the current layer. The Properties palette operates as follows: ■ If no objects are selected. the Properties palette displays the current default property settings. and you can change its properties. setting. Use the Layer Properties Manager button to make adjustments to drawing layers. and modifying the properties of objects. ■ When you click an object. click one of the drawing template files and then click Open. Use the Properties and Layers Toolbars You can use the controls in the Properties toolbar and the Layers toolbar to view. 2 In the Select Template dialog box. Try it: Change the Auto-hide behavior of the Properties palette 1 Right-click the Properties palette title bar. and modify the properties the same way as the Properties palette.Use the Properties Palette The Properties palette is the primary tool for viewing. Leaving the palette open keeps it handy. the Properties palette displays all the properties that they have in common. set. and you can set the default properties for all subsequently created objects. Click Auto-hide on the shortcut menu. the Properties palette displays the properties of that object. By default. The Properties toolbar provides convenient access to the most important object properties. Color control Properties toolbar The Layers toolbar controls layer properties. these toolbars are displayed above the drawing area. 3 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties. Try it: Display the Properties palette 1 Click File menu ➤ New. and you can change their common properties.

you will use several controls to view and change the properties of layers and objects. Layer Properties Manager Layer control make the layer of the currently selected object the current layer. and lineweight properties of the object are set to ByLayer. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager. The color of the Dimension layer is red. 2 In the Select File dialog box. 3 In the select Color dialog box. 7 Click several more objects with different colors. Change the default color of a layer 1 Click Format menu ➤ Layer. Notice that all the objects on the Dimension layer are now green. Examine the current default properties settings. you can change the properties of all objects on that layer in one operation. find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT installation folder and open arbor. Because all of the dimensions are on a single layer. 3 Click the Model tab. click the green box and click OK. Click OK again to exit the Layer Properties Manager. Move your cursor onto the title bar of the Properties palette. linetype.dwg. The color. 2 On the Properties toolbar. Tutorial: Change Object Properties In this tutorial. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click a dimension object in the drawing to select it. Notice that several properties of this object are displayed in the Properties toolbar near the top of the application window. Notice that only the common properties of the objects are listed. The layer of the object is Dimension.Layers toolbar make the previous layer the current layer. Change the color of an individual object 1 Click any green dimension object to select it. 8 Move your cursor off the Properties palette and press ESC to cancel the selection. 62 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects . click the Color control and click Magenta. click the red box under the Color column of the Dimension layer. 4 Move your cursor onto the title bar of the Properties palette. Examine the additional properties of the dimension object in the Properties palette. 6 Move your cursor onto the title bar of the Properties palette to open it.

5 Click the green check mark button at the top of the Layer Properties Manager.Color control Properties toolbar The color of the selected object changes to magenta. the dimension object’s color will remain magenta. 8 Use the Layer Properties Manager to turn the Dimension layer back on. All new objects will be created on this layer until you change the current layer to a different one. 3 Click Format menu ➤ Layer 4 In the Layer Properties Manager. 9 Close the drawing without saving it. 4 Click the same dimension object. 3 Press ESC to exit. This restores the color property behavior of the dimension object. Layers toolbar Layer control 2 Click a different layer to make it the current layer. click a layer to select it. You can use any of the standard linetypes that AutoCAD LT provides. or you can create your own linetypes. 7 Click the lightbulb image for the Dimension layer to turn it off. 5 Click the Color control and click ByLayer. Use Linetypes You can associate a single linetype with all of the AutoCAD LT objects drawn on the same layer or you can assign linetypes individually to objects. Then click anywhere in the drawing area. If you change the layer color. Change the current layer 1 Click the Layer control on the Layers toolbar. overriding the green color of the object’s layer. 6 Click the Layer control on the Layers toolbar. Click OK to make the selected layer the current layer. Object Properties Overview | 63 . All objects on the Dimension layer are now hidden.

scroll down the list of linetypes and click HIDDENX2.CONTINUOUS HIDDEN CENTER PHANTOM To use a linetype. 5 Click Show Details. This setting overrides the linetype assigned to the current layer. click Load. Notice that the Properties toolbar near the top of the application window displays the HIDDENX2 linetype as current rather than BYLAYER. you must first load it into your drawing using the Linetype Manager. Try it: Load a linetype and make it current 1 Click File menu ➤ New and select a drawing template. Click OK. 7 Click the Model tab. 64 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects . 2 Click Format menu ➤ Linetype. All subsequently created objects will be displayed using this linetype. You check this option if you want linetypes automatically scaled in layout viewports. Click OK. Several linetype scaling options are displayed. Notice the Use Paper Space Units for Scaling option. 3 In the Linetype Manager. 4 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box. 6 Click the HIDDENX2 linetype and click Current.

2 Double-click within a layout viewport to enter model space.8 Click Draw menu ➤ Line and click several locations in the drawing area to draw line segments. ■ Global Scale Factor. you need to regenerate the model space display within a layout viewport on the layout tab. Dashed linetype scaled to the model Dashed linetype scaled to the layout Use the Details area of the Linetype Manager to control the linetype scale in layout viewports. 3 Click View menu ➤ Regen. Press ENTER to end the command. Sets the linetype scale for newly created objects. ■ Current Object Scale. Object Properties Overview | 65 . 9 Use the Linetype Manager or the Properties toolbar to return the current linetype to BYLAYER. Scales the linetypes in paper space and model space identically. may increase or decrease. The linetypes within the layout viewport are scaled according to the viewport display scale setting. Sets the global scale factor for all linetypes. you can create inconsistencies in the appearance of linetypes. The steps required are 1 Click a layout tab. To update a linetype scale. Scale Linetypes When you scale views in layout viewports. All subsequently created objects will be displayed using the linetype assigned to the current layer. ■ Use Paper Space Units for Scaling. In noncontinuous linetypes. and the space between them. the length of dashes and dots. You can set the scaling to correspond to the model or layout scale or to remain the same at any zoom scale.

NOTE You can assign a color. you can create heavy and thin lines to show cuts in sections. or lineweight to individual objects. click a heavier lineweight such as 0. 6 Use the Lineweight Settings dialog box or the Properties toolbar to return the current linetype to BYLAYER. objects that are created will be displayed using the heavier lineweight. Press ENTER. 4 Click Display Lineweight and click OK. Objects with a heavier lineweight always appear at the specified line width regardless of display scale. 2 Click Format menu ➤ Lineweight. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box. and differences in details. linetype. objects that are created will be displayed using the lineweight assigned to the current layer. 7 Practice setting linetypes and lineweights. Whether you choose to assign these properties individually or by layer settings depends on your drawing organization and company standards. regardless of the default layer setting. depth in elevations.020”. Try it: Choose a lineweight and make it current 1 Click the Model tab.Assign Lineweights Using lineweights. dimension lines and tick marks. Lineweights are independent of the current display scale.50 mm or 0. 5 Click Draw menu ➤ Line and draw several line segments. 66 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects . From now on. Notice that the Properties toolbar near the top of the application window displays the new lineweight as current. under Lineweights. From now on.

Click on one side of the line. and rivers in maps Segments with fixed or tapered widths Polygons are closed polylines with equal-length sides and angles. enter 10. pentagons. Click Modify menu ➤ Offset. Try it: Offset a line to create parallel lines 1 2 3 4 5 6 Draw a line. At the offset distance prompt. offset arcs offset lines Offsetting objects is one of the most efficient construction methods used in AutoCAD LT. The Polygon command is the simplest method for creating equilateral triangles. You can use the OFFSET command to create parallel lines as well as concentric circles and parallel curves. A line can be one segment or a series of successive segments. Create Parallel Lines An offset line is an exact replica of a line that is drawn at a specified distance from the original line. Click the line to offset. Use polylines for creating objects such as ■ ■ ■ ■ Traces on printed circuit boards Borders Contour lines. such as in a contour map. Press ENTER to end the command. squares. roads. use a polyline. hexagons. Draw Lines | 67 .Draw Lines The line is the most basic object in AutoCAD LT. but each segment is a separate line object. Draw Polylines and Polygons A polyline is a connected sequence of line or arc segments created as a single object. and so on. If you need to draw a series of line segments as a single object.

enter a to switch to Arc mode and continue with an arc segment (3).Draw Polylines To draw each polyline segment. 68 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects . and then draw another line segment. you specify a start point and an endpoint. You can include arc segments in polylines. Enter L to return to Line mode. 3 Click the polyline. End the command. ■ Enter c to create a closed loop. To draw additional segments. do one of the following: ■ Press ENTER to end the command. The resulting object is a closed polyline in the shape of a rectangle. Try it: Create a polyline with arc segments 1 2 3 4 5 Click Draw menu ➤ Polyline. 2 At each prompt. 3 2 1 Endpoint of arc Final segment Try it: Create a rectangle 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Rectangle. Try it: Create a polyline 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Polyline. 2 Click a location on the screen. Notice that the segments all belong to a single object. After several points. At the next prompt. click a point. 3 Move the cursor diagonally and click another location. Draw a polyline segment (1 and 2). continue to specify points in your drawing.

do one of the following: ■ Move the cursor and click a location. Click a location for the center of the polygon. you can ■ Separate the polyline into independent segments with the EXPLODE command. This determines how the distance that you enter in the next prompt is measured. ■ Enter a distance. inscribed radius circumscribed radius 5 To specify a “radius” of the polygon. You can also make polyline segments taper. 6. Draw Lines | 69 . Uniform width Mixed width Tapered segment Once you create a polyline. Enter the number of sides. line or arc with the JOIN command. The resulting object is also a closed polyline. Specify either the Inscribed or the Circumscribed option. You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options after you specify a starting point for a polyline. for example. ■ Join a polyine to another polyline.Try it: Create a polygon 1 2 3 4 Click Draw menu ➤ Polygon.

The following examples illustrate three ways to specify two points and an included angle. end. radius Center. angle 70 | Chapter 5 Draw Objects . 1 1 2 included angle Start. angle 1 2 Center. angle. Define the circumference of the circle with two or three points. angle 2 Start. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify the center and radius (default method). radius. radius center radius 3 1 2 1 2 tangent objects Tangent. Draw Circles To create circles. start. you can specify various combinations of center.Draw Circles and Arcs You can create a variety of basic curved objects with AutoCAD LT. center. tangent. Specify the center and diameter. chord length. radius Two points defining diameter Three points defining circumference Draw Arcs To create arcs. Create the circle tangent to two objects and specify a radius. including circles and arcs. start point. and direction values. Create the circle tangent to two existing objects. endpoint.

LINETYPE. COLOR. CIRCLE. To get started Action Set properties Load. LINE. This is often the preferred method for creating arcs and will be covered later. PLINE. RECTANG. scale. PSLTSCALE. POLYGON. PEDIT. and manage linetypes Change lineweight settings Draw lines Draw parallel lines Draw polylines Draw polygons Separate polyline segments Join polylines Draw circles Draw arcs Menu Tools ➤ Properties Modify ➤ Properties Format ➤ Linetype Format ➤ Lineweight Draw ➤ Line Modify ➤ Offset Draw ➤ Polyline Draw ➤ Polygon Modify ➤ Explode Modify ➤ Join Draw ➤ Circle Draw ➤ Arc Toolbar Standard Properties Properties Draw Modify Draw Draw Modify Modify Draw Draw Help system PROPERTIES. EXPLODE. CELTSCALE. OFFSET. LINEWEIGHT. LTSCALE.NOTE The FILLET command creates an arc tangent to two existing objects. JOIN. ARC Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 5 What is the result of setting the color of an object to ByLayer? What is the fastest way to change the current layer to a different one? What would you do to access a complete list of the properties of an object? What command is recommended for creating parallel lines and curves? What type of object is composed of a series of connected segments? Draw Circles and Arcs | 71 . LAYER.

Enter coordinate values to locate points precisely Turn on polar tracking to draw along specified angles Turn on Ortho to draw horizontal and vertical lines Turn on Grid and Snap to draw within a predefined framework Use object snaps to locate precise points on objects .

. . . . . . . . . . .Precision Drawing Set Grid and Snap Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Specify Angles and Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Tutorial: Draw with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Draw with Absolute Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Use Polar Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Set Grid Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Use Cartesian and Polar Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Set Running Object Snaps . . . 74 Set Grid and Snap Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Object Snap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Specify an Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Use Single Object Snaps. . . . . . . . . 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Snap to Precise Points on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Draw with Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Draw with Relative Cartesian Coordinates . . . 81 Specify Distances . . . . . . . . .

Snap is useful for specifying precise points with the cursor. 74 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing . You might set a wide grid spacing to be used as a reference but maintain a closer snap spacing for accuracy in specifying points. 3 Move the pointer around in the drawing area while Snap is turned on. or “snap.” to points at equal intervals in the drawing area. ■ Snap restricts the movement of the crosshairs to intervals that you have defined. Notice that the grid dots cover a limited area. you might set the grid spacing to 10 times the snap spacing in a metric drawing or 12 times the snap spacing in an imperial drawing. The grid helps you align objects and visualize the distances between them. or “snap. Notice that the button changes to indicate that Snap has been turned on. If you zoom in or out. the cursor seems to adhere. Try it: Constrain the cursor with Snap 1 Start a new drawing. When Snap is on. For example. 2 Click the Snap button on the status bar. 2 Turn Grid and Snap off. The grid does not appear in the plotted drawing. Notice that the cursor seems to adhere.” to an invisible grid. Set Grid and Snap Spacing The grid does not necessarily correspond to the current snap interval.Set Grid and Snap Values The grid and snap features set up a framework that you can use as a guide while drawing. the grid limits. ■ Grid displays a rectangular pattern of dots that extends over the area specified by the drawing grid limits. you might need to adjust grid spacing to be more appropriate for the new magnification. Try it: Display a grid 1 Click the Grid button on the status bar.

Set Grid and Snap Values | 75 .Try it: Change the Grid and Snap spacing 1 2 3 4 Right-click either the Grid or Snap button on the status bar. 3 Repeat using two different points. In the Drafting Settings dialog box. Click Settings on the shortcut menu. specify new spacings for Grid and Snap. Set Grid Limits Grid limits shown by range of grid dots Try it: Change the grid limits 1 Click Format menu ➤ Drawing Limits. 2 Click two points to represent the lower-left and the upper-right corners of a rectangular area. Turn on Grid and Snap. Click OK.

you can use the cursor to specify a point in the drawing area or you can enter coordinate values. and the Y value specifies vertical distance. For example. Use Cartesian and Polar Coordinates In two-dimensional space.4. the X axis and the Y axis.0) indicates where the two axes intersect.3 represent a point 5 units along the X axis and 3 units along the Y axis.0 76 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing . When a command prompts you for a point.4 Y 3. you specify points on a plane that is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper. Absolute coordinate values are based on the origin. the line in the illustration begins at an X value of –2 and a Y value of 1 and ends at 3. Draw with Absolute Cartesian Coordinates Use absolute Cartesian coordinates when you know the precise X and Y values of the location of the point.Draw with Coordinates Coordinates represent locations in your drawing.1 -Y 0.Y) or polar (distance<angle) coordinates. The origin (0. For example. ■ Polar coordinates use a distance and an angle to locate a point. the coordinates 5. Relative coordinate values are based on the last point entered. The X value specifies horizontal distance. The entries on the command line were as follows: Command: line Specify first point: #–2. the coordinates 5<30 specifies a point that is a distance of 5 units from the origin and at a 30 degree angle from the X axis. For example.4 –X X -2. You can enter two-dimensional coordinates as either Cartesian (X. You can use absolute or relative values with each method.1 Specify next point or [Undo]: #3. ■ Cartesian coordinates are measured from two perpendicular lines.

1. start the next coordinates with the @ symbol. to locate a point relative to the absolute coordinates –2. For example. the # is not used to specify absolute coordinates. Draw with Relative Cartesian Coordinates Use relative Cartesian coordinates when you know the location of a point in relation to the previous point.Entering the # identifies the coordinates as absolute coordinates.3 Entering @5.4 in the previous example. NOTE Absolute coordinates are entered differently if dynamic input (the DYN button on the status bar) is turned off. In that case.3 locates the same point in this example as entering #3.1 Specify next point or [Undo]: @5. Draw with Coordinates | 77 . Command: line Specify first point: #–2.

press TAB. Press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu object snaps NOTE To cycle through all the object snap points available for a particular object. right-clicking. AutoCAD LT identifies an active object snap point with AutoSnap markers and tooltips. or to the tangent on an arc. You can specify an object snap whenever AutoCAD LT prompts for a point. to the endpoint of another line segment. Once you have specified an object snap. Use Single Object Snaps When AutoCAD LT prompts you for a point. use the cursor to select a location on an object. you can use an object snap to draw a line to the exact center of a circle. 78 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing .Snap to Precise Points on Objects Using object snaps is the most important way to specify an exact location on an object without having to use coordinates. When you move your cursor over an object. you can specify a single object snap by holding down SHIFT. and choosing an object snap from the Object Snap menu. For example.

click Settings. Try it: Change the running object snap settings 1 Right-click Osnap on the status bar.Set Running Object Snaps To use the same object snap repeatedly. Snap to Precise Points on Objects | 79 . It will stay active until you turn it off. you might set Center as a running snap if you need to connect the centers of a series of circles with a line. 3 On the Drafting Settings dialog box. Click OK. For example. select the object snaps you want to use. such as Endpoint and Center. You can set multiple running object snaps. 2 On the shortcut menu. set it as a running object snap.

or ellipses Quadrant Quadrants of arcs. circles. arcs. for single object snaps. Object snap Endpoint Snaps to Object endpoints Midpoint Object midpoints Intersection Object intersections or. or ellipses Perpendicular Points on objects that form a perpendicular alignment with the last point specified Tangent Point on a circle or arc that.Object Snap Descriptions The following table illustrates commonly used object snaps. forms a line tangent to the object 80 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing . when connected to the last point. locations where intersections would occur if objects were extended Center Center points of circles.

using direct distance entry helps you draw perpendicular lines of a specified length efficiently. Polar tracking constrains the cursor to an angle. When polar tracking is on. in this case 180 degrees.Specify Angles and Distances You can quickly specify angles and distances using the polar tracking.5<45 tooltip display of distance and angle Polar tracking restricts cursor movement to specified angles Try it: Use polar tracking 1 Click Polar on the status bar to turn it on.. For example. you can create a series of perpendicular lines by turning on Polar before you start drawing. 1000 Specify Angles and Distances | 81 . alignment path Polar: 1. direct-distance entry. you can draw faster. knowing that the lines are perpendicular. in this case. Because the lines are constrained to the horizontal and vertical axes. Specify Distances Use direct distance entry to specify an exact line length quickly—by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering the distance from the first point. Use Polar Tracking As you draw lines or move objects. you can use polar tracking to restrict the movement of the cursor to specified angle increments (the default value is 90 degrees). then direct distance entry determines the exact length of the line. and angle override features.. 2 Draw several lines at 90 degrees from each other.

you would enter Command: line Specify first point: #–2. Click a point and then move the cursor to the right (0 degrees). Move the cursor up (90 degrees) and enter another value. and want that line to be at a 10 degree angle with a length of 50.Try it: Draw several lines of specified lengths 1 2 3 4 5 Click Draw menu ➤ Line. Repeat several more times and then press ENTER. 82 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing . you will practice using some of the precision tools available in AutoCAD LT to create the following drawing. if you start drawing a line at the coordinates –2.1. Enter a value. which can be the beginning of a design for ■ A health spa with exercise pool ■ A catch for a window lock ■ A housing for a motor assembly NOTE It is important that you save this drawing as you work. For example. Specify an Angle If the angle that you want to use is not going to be used frequently. It will be used in several future tutorials in this guide. you can enter an angle override.1 Specify next point or [Undo]: <10 (Move the cursor in the desired direction) Specify next point or [Undo]: 50 Tutorial: Draw with Precision In this tutorial.

Sample architectural template (imperial) Tutorial-iMfg. Move the cursor over an endpoint of a line. click Endpoint. Dynamic Input (Dyn) should also be turned on. Press SHIFT and right-click again. When you see an AutoSnap marker. 4 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Endpoint. Sample architectural template (metric) Tutorial-mMfg. 2 Click Draw menu ➤ Line and click several locations to create a series of line segments to create the previously illustrated design. 5 Turn Grid and Snap off. 2 Select the tutorial drawing template file that is closest to your intended application and units of measurement: ■ ■ ■ ■ Tutorial-mArch. Create a line using object snaps 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase. and then click another point to specify its radius. Move the cursor over the opposite endpoint and click. The line is erased. 3 Click Draw menu ➤ Circle ➤ Center. but how do you create another line to take its place with precision? 3 4 5 6 7 Click Draw menu ➤ Line.dwt. The exact dimensions don’t matter. The crosshairs cursor changes into a square pickbox cursor. click. 4 Click a point to locate the center of the circle.dwt. Use MyDesign as the file name. Use Grid and Snap to create an outline 1 On the status bar. Press ENTER to end the command. Sample mechanical design template (metric) Tutorial-iArch. From the object snap menu.1 Click File menu ➤ New. Press SHIFT and right-click. but use reasonable distances for the design. From the object snap menu.dwt. Sample mechanical design template (imperial) 3 Click the Model tab. turn on Grid and Snap. Radius. Specify Angles and Distances | 83 . Press ENTER to end the command. The endpoints of the new line are located exactly at the endpoints of the adjacent lines. 2 Click directly on one of the lines that you created and then press ENTER.dwt.

Drafting tab Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Polar Tracking Object Snap Object Snap Toolbar Help system GRID. Snap and Grid tab SHIFT+right-click for the object snap menu Tools ➤ Drafting Settings. MyDesign should be the file name. Center. ■ Turn running object snaps on and create several more lines. Perpendicular. OSNAP. and Tangent. DYNMODE. LIMITS. SNAP. To get started Action Set Snap and Grid spacing Use single object snaps Set running object snaps Change AutoSnap settings Change polar settings Menu Tools ➤ Drafting Settings.8 Do the following: ■ Experiment with creating lines using the following object snaps: Midpoint. Object Snap tab Tools ➤ Options. ■ Create a line from the center of the circle at a 30 degree angle and 10 units long. 10 Save the drawing. UCS. DSETTINGS. 9 Erase any objects that are not part of the illustrated result. OPTIONS Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 5 How do you turn off the grid dots in your drawing area? The term origin refers to what coordinate values? Pressing SHIFT while you right-click displays what shortcut menu? What button can you turn on to ensure that the line you are drawing is exactly vertical? What is meant by the term direct distance entry? 84 | Chapter 6 Precision Drawing .

.

Use OFFSET to create parallel lines and concentric circles Use TRIM to remove the parts of objects that extend beyond cutting edges that you specify Use FILLET to connect two lines with an arc Use COPY to create duplicates at locations that you specify Use DIST to measure the distance between two points Use MIRROR to create an exact replica of objects across a mirror line .

. . . . . . . 88 Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Analyze Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extend. . . . . . . 92 Offset Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Use Editing Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Specify a Selection Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Create Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Edit with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . 92 Copy Objects . . . . . . . . . . 95 Move Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Match Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Tutorial: Create a New Drawing with Precision . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Fillet Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Make Modifications Select Objects to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Object Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Tutorial: Modify Objects with Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Mirror Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Duplicate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Erase Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Move and Rotate Objects . . 90 Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . 89 Extend Objects. . . . . . .

You can clear a selection by pressing ESC. You can use two methods to specify which objects to modify: ■ Choose the command first. Specify a Selection Area You can select objects by enclosing them in a rectangular selection area. Click objects individually.Select Objects to Edit When you edit objects. grips are displayed on the objects that you can use to modify the objects directly. which selects objects within and crossing the selection area. NOTE You can remove objects from the selection set by pressing SHIFT and then clicking them. Object Selection Methods The two most common methods to select objects are ■ Select individual objects. You define a rectangular selection area in the drawing area by clicking opposite corners. which selects only objects entirely within the selection area. ■ Specify a selection area. ■ Choose the objects first. Select objects and then start the editing command. Click a rectangular area around the objects to be selected. ■ Drag from left to right to create a window selection. you select one or more objects to specify a selection set of the objects. Choose an editing command and then select objects to modify. when you use this method. 88 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . In addition. 1 2 Objects selected using window selection ■ Drag from right to left to create a crossing selection. The order in which you specify the corners makes a difference.

arcs.Erase. 6 Select the other objects that you created in step 1 individually and press ENTER to erase them. notice which objects are selected and erased. The example shows how you use window selection to erase a section of piping. 1 2 Objects selected with window selection Selected objects Result Try it: Practice using window and crossing selection 1 2 3 4 Start a new drawing. and circles. Erase. ■ Extend lengthens an object to a precise boundary. Again. 5 Select several more objects using a window selection and press ENTER. Create some lines. ■ Trim shortens an object to a precise boundary and removes the excess. Notice which objects are selected and erased. and Trim Objects | 89 . Erase Objects You can use all the object selection methods with the ERASE command. Click Modify menu ➤ Erase. Select several objects using a crossing selection and press ENTER. Extend. Extend. and Trim Objects These methods delete objects or change their lengths: ■ Erase deletes the entire object.

Notice that you select the boundary objects first. click one end of the line and then the other end of the line. you cut an object at an edge defined by one or more objects.Extend Objects You can extend objects so that they end precisely at a boundary defined by other objects. objects defined as cutting edges must intersect the object to be trimmed. Then create circle that encompasses the line. If you press ENTER instead of selecting boundary objects. click the circle. Press ENTER to accept all objects as boundaries Select objects to extend nearest to the end to be extended Result Try it: Extend an object 1 Create a short line. To trim. 3 At the Select Objects prompt. 5 At the next Select Objects prompt. Press ENTER to end the command. Trim Objects Trimming objects is very similar to extending them. 4 Press ENTER to end boundary selection. which is the nearest boundary. all visible objects in the drawing become potential boundaries. By default. The illustration shows lines extended precisely to the circle. This step is easy to forget. 1 3 2 Cutting edges selected with a crossing selection Object to trim selected Result 90 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . 2 Click Modify menu ➤ Extend.

click points 1 and 2 as previously illustrated. If you press ENTER without selecting any boundary objects. 4 Press ENTER to end boundary selection. and Trim Objects | 91 . all objects become potential boundaries. you must accept the selection set of boundary objects by pressing ENTER. NOTE With both EXTEND and TRIM. 2 Click Modify menu ➤ Trim. You can use the Perpendicular object snap to make sure that the two horizontal lines intersect the vertical line.Try it: Trim an object 1 Create two horizontal lines and two vertical lines as shown in the left side of the previous illustration. 3 At the Select Objects prompt. Notice that you select the boundary objects first. 5 At the next Select Objects prompt. and then select the objects to be trimmed. Erase. Press ENTER to end the command. Extend. click the vertical line at point 3 as shown.

and then specify a second point to determine the distance and direction of the copy. you select one or more objects to copy. ■ Offset creates new objects at a specified distance from selected objects or through a specified point. Click Modify menu ➤ Copy. 5 Click the corner of the rectangle at point 2 as shown. 92 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . click the circle and press ENTER. the circle is copied from one rectangle to a corresponding location on the second rectangle. 2 Specify a base point (endpoint object snap) 3 Specify second point (endpoint object snap) 1 Select the circle Try it: Copy an object Result 1 2 3 4 Create two rectangles and a circle as shown on the left side of the previous illustration. For example. Copy Objects To copy an object. called a base point. in the following illustration. The two points can be anywhere within the drawing. At the Select Objects prompt. Click Endpoint. ■ Mirror creates a mirror image of objects around a specified mirror line. specify a start point. At the Specify Base Point prompt.Duplicate Objects There are several ways to make copies of objects: ■ Copy creates new objects at a specified location. press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu.

You can also copy objects specifying a base point followed by direct distance entry. Offsetting circles creates larger or smaller circles depending on the offset side. press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu. 8 Press ENTER to end the command. For an easy way to create parallel lines or concentric circles. 7 Click the corner of the other rectangle at point 3 as shown. use offsetting. enter a distance Objects selected Base point specified and a distance entered Result The Copy command automatically repeats so you can easily create multiple copies. Duplicate Objects | 93 . typically with polar snap turned on. The copied circle is at the same location relative to its enclosing rectangle as the original circle.6 At the Specify Second Point prompt. Click Endpoint. base point next point next point next point Object selected(bush) Result second point Offset Objects Offsetting creates a new object that seems to trace a selected object at a specified distance.

which you define with two points. 4 mirror line 1 2 Objects selected 3 Mirror line defined Result with original retained Mirroring is useful for creating symmetrical objects. 94 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . You can draw half the object and quickly mirror it rather than draw the whole object.original object object offset NOTE Offsetting several objects followed by trimming or extending them is a very efficient drawing technique. Mirror Objects You mirror objects around a mirror line. You then choose to delete or retain the original objects.

In the following example. you specify the base point (1) and a second point (2) that determines the angle of rotation (2) for the orientation of a house. However. In the illustration. specify base point and new location of the selected objects. Move and Rotate Objects | 95 . Move Objects You move objects the same way that you copy them. you could have entered -35 to specify the rotation in degrees. specify the base point (1). these steps move the window higher and away from the door. You can specify the rotation angle by specifying a point or entering a value for the angle. this setting can be changed using the UNITS command. a positive angle results in a counter-clockwise rotation. Rotate Objects You rotate objects by specifying a base point and a rotation angle. 1 2 Select objects. You select the object to move. NOTE By default.Move and Rotate Objects An important drawing technique is to create one or more objects and then move or rotate them into place. and then specify a second point to determine the distance and direction of the move (2). Repeating the rotation with the same base point and angle would result in the house being rotated a total of 70 degrees from its original orientation. 1 2 Objects selected Base point and angle of rotation Result Instead of specifying the second point in the example.

more than one possible fillet can exist between circles and arcs. You can also fillet circles. Objects selected Result One useful technique is to set the fillet radius to 0. 96 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . This results in two objects intersecting in a sharp corner as illustrated. and polylines. By default. Use the Radius option of the Fillet command to specify arc radius of the fillet. No arc is created. AutoCAD LT chooses the endpoint closest to your selection point. Changing the radius sets the default radius for subsequent fillets. arcs. Radius set to 0. objects selected Result NOTE You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a value of 0. the filleted objects are trimmed as shown in the illustration.Fillet Corners Filleting connects two objects with an arc of a specified radius that is tangent to the objects. Depending on the points you specify.

The fence between lots 38 and 39 was extended. empty lot How would you divide the empty lot? The proposal accepted by the property owners expanded lots 26 and 27 to make their total lot sizes equal. but this benefit was offset by its irregular shape. you will use precision drawing techniques to modify part of an assessor’s map. The only requirement was that the property owners agree on an equitable division. Lot 38 was larger than the others. The adjoining property owners of an empty city lot persuaded their city council to allow them to acquire the lot.Tutorial: Modify Objects with Precision In the following tutorial. Fillet Corners | 97 .

3 To simplify the display. 98 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications .73 and a circle with a radius of 39. you create some “construction geometry” that makes the task easier. turn off the Text layer. but without making lot 38 too narrow or too large. To accomplish this task. find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT product folder and open map. and the bottom end of the new property will be displaced by 39. 4 Use the Circle command and object snaps to create a circle with a radius of 15.94 feet.dwg.73 feet. These distances were determined using trial-and-error to make lots 26 and 27 about equal in area. The top end of the new property line will be displaced 15. 2 In the Select File dialog box. You first create a new property line on the left side of the triangular lot.Use the following procedure to change the boundaries of the lots.94 centered on the intersections as shown in the illustration. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

Fillet Corners | 99 .5 Use intersection object snaps to create a new property line as shown in the illustration. 6 Erase the old property line and the two construction circles.

extend the old property line to the new one. 9 Press ENTER. 7 Click Modify menu ➤ Extend. 100 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . This line is the boundary for extending the old property line. 8 Click the new property line. It separates the objects that serve as boundaries from the objects to be extended.Next. This action is important and easily forgotten. 10 Click the old property line near the end to be extended as shown.

narrow lot. Fillet Corners | 101 . 12 Use the same method to extend the other property line to the lower border.11 Press ENTER to end the command. 13 Erase the old property lines to open the long.

But how can you find the new areas of the lots? Find the areas of the lots 1 On the command line. A closed polyline object is created using the property lines for each lot.14 Draw a short property line using the endpoint object snap between the end points of the property lines as shown. 2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box. These closed polylines are superimposed upon the existing property lines and can later be erased. Press ENTER to end the command. enter boundary. 102 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . click Pick Points. The new property lines are complete. Then click inside each of the lots.

Note As you move your cursor over the map, different polylines highlight. Where the polylines share a common boundary, only one of them is highlighted. To avoid these common boundaries, move your cursor around the outer edges of the map. Alternatively, you can press CTRL and click a shared boundary repeatedly to cycle through all objects at that location.

3 4 5 6 7

Click Modify menu ➤ Properties. Click one of the boundaries and find the area listed in the Properties palette. Press ESC to clear the selection. Find the area of each of the other lots. Close the map drawing without saving it.

Tutorial: Create a New Drawing with Precision
In the following tutorial, you will create a detail drawing of a type of jet engine mount used to attach jet engines to commercial aircraft. You will be happy to know that this part is made of a highstrength, nickel-chromium-iron alloy.

NOTE Each step in this tutorial is not specified in detail. When in doubt, feel free to review earlier
portions in this guide or use the Help system. You can access all the commands in this tutorial using the Draw and Modify menus.

Fillet Corners

|

103

1 Start a new drawing using the drawing template file, Tutorial-mMfg.dwt.
This template is for mechanical design drawings using metric units. All distances are assumed to be in millimeters.

2 Click the Model tab. 3 Make sure that the Polar and Osnap buttons on the status bar are turned on. The current layer
should be Model-Front. Create the front view

1 Create a circle with a diameter (not radius) of 50 mm at the coordinates 180,100.
Note The precise location of this circle is not critical in this tutorial, but it’s a good idea to make sure
that several significant features coincide with snap locations. For single-view drawings or 3D models, it’s a good idea to have a significant feature located at the origin (0,0). This is convenient when referencing a drawing from another drawing such as with assembly drawings.

2 Use the Center object snap to draw a circle with a diameter of 24 using the center point of the
previous circle. The Center object snap may not be a default running object snap. Press SHIFT and right-click to access the object snap menu.

3 Using PolarSnap to lock the angle at 0 degrees, copy the two circles to a location 125 mm to the
right. Command: copy Select objects: Select the two circles and press ENTER Specify base point or [Displacement]: Click the center of the circles and move your cursor to the right Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>: 125 Specify second point or [Exit/Undo]: Press ENTER

4 Offset the inner circle on left by 4 mm to the outside.
Command: offset Specify offset distance or [Through/Erase/Layer]: 4 Select object to offset or [Exit/Undo]: Select the left inner circle Specify point on side to offset or [Exit/Multiple/Undo]: Click anywhere outside the circles

104

|

Chapter 7

Make Modifications

5 Create a circle using the tangent-tangent-radius (Ttr) option. The radius should be 250 mm.
Notice that the AutoSnap marker for tangent is turned on automatically. Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: t Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select an outer circle near the expected tangent location Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select the other outer circle as shown Specify radius of circle: 250 (only part of the circle is shown in the illustration)

6 Trim the large circle as shown below.

Fillet Corners

|

105

move the cursor upward and enter 100 to make the line 100 mm long. Again. you could have used the Fillet command to fillet the two outer circles with a radius of 250 mm. Create the top view 1 Set the current layer to Model-Top. 106 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . There are often alternative methods for each step. With polar snap on. The front view of the part is complete. use SHIFT and right-click to access the object snap menu. For example. to create the lower arc. Create another 100 mm line on the right side of the part. Next. You can use the Layer control on the Layers toolbar.7 Use the Mirror command to mirror the arc using the center points of the left and right circles to define the mirror line. or the Layer Properties Manager. 8 Trim the outer-left circle as shown. 2 Use the Quadrant object snap to create a line starting from the left side of the part. you will use the objects in the front view to create the top view of the part.

4 Offset the horizontal line downward by 12 mm.3 Use the Endpoint object snap to create a line connecting the upper ends of the vertical lines. 7 Trim the four vertical lines representing the silhouette edges of the holes as shown. boundary line for trim 8 Trim the other vertical lines as shown. 5 Trim the lower ends of the vertical lines to create the rectangular outline of the top view. Fillet Corners | 107 . Don’t forget to press ENTER after selecting the horizontal boundary line for the trimming. Create vertical lines from the quadrants of the other circles as shown. 6 Offset the topmost horizontal line upward by 3 mm. Zoom and pan as needed.

This line will be the trim boundary for the runout on the part.boundary line for trim 9 Trim the topmost horizontal line as shown. boundary line for trim 12 Erase the vertical trim boundary line. erase line 108 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . 11 Trim the horizontal line to the boundary line as shown. 10 Create a vertical line that starts from the endpoint of the arc and ends perpendicular to the horizontal line as shown.

13 Extend the remaining vertical line as shown.
extend line

14 Add 1 mm fillets to the outside corners.
The top view is almost complete. You still need to change the hidden silhouette edges of the holes to a dashed linetype.

silhouette edges To change the linetype of the four vertical lines, you will override the linetype property currently assigned to the lines. As you remember, you can select the objects and then use either the Properties palette or the Properties toolbar to specify the required linetype. Change linetypes

1 Select the four vertical silhoutte edges of the holes. 2 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties.
Notice that because you selected more than one object, only the common properties are listed.

3 On the Properties palette, click Linetype. Click the arrow and, from the list, click
ACAD_ISO02W100.

4 Click Linetype Scale. Type 0.3 for the new linetype scale and press ENTER. 5 Move your cursor off the Properties palette and press ESC to clear the selection.
The four lines are now displayed with a dashed linetype.

NOTE Instead of changing the linetype of the four lines individually, you could have created a new layer for hidden lines. The linetype property of that layer could then be set to ACAD_ISO02W100. Then, to change the linetype of the four lines, you would change the layer assignment of the lines to the new layer.

6 The tutorial is complete. If you want to keep this drawing, save it now.

Fillet Corners

|

109

Match Properties
You can easily copy properties of one object to other objects. You can choose to match color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, thickness, plot style, and in some cases dimension styles, text styles, and hatch patterns. Try it: Copy the properties from one object to other objects

1 2 3 4 5

Start a new drawing. Draw several objects with different color properties. Click Modify menu ➤ Match Properties. Click the source object from which you want to copy properties. Click the objects to which you want to copy the properties.

You can also use the Settings option of the command to select the properties you want to match and clear the ones you don’t.

110

|

Chapter 7

Make Modifications

Use Editing Aids
The following editing aids help you modify drawings efficiently: ■ Grips edit objects using your cursor and a shortcut menu. ■ Revision clouds identify areas that have been updated.

Edit with Grips
Grips are small squares and arrows that appear on an object after it has been selected. They mark control locations and are powerful editing tools. move grip to end of horizontal line 2 1

select line

click grip

After you select an object, you can click a grip and move it with your cursor. For more options, click a grip and right-click to display a shortcut menu. Then choose a grip edit mode.

Grip edit modes

Grip edit mode options

Use Editing Aids

|

111

5 Choose a different grip mode such as Move. Create Revision Clouds If you review or redline drawings. Rotate. 3 Click a grip on an object and click its new location. 4 Click a grip on an object and then right-click. 2 Click several objects to select them and to display their grips. you can increase your productivity by using revision clouds to highlight your markups. 3 Repeat the command and see whether the revision cloud always creates the arcs outward or if you can trick it. 112 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . ■ Notice the grip behavior when you stretch a grip onto another grip. or Scale. This is the default stretch mode. Mirror. ■ Notice the grip behavior when object snaps are turned on. 2 Click anywhere in the drawing area and move your cursor to encompass an area.Try it: Edit objects using grips 1 Draw several objects. 6 Press ESC to exit grip editing. You draw the revision cloud around the objects you want to emphasize. creating a polyline in the shape of a cloud. as shown in the following illustration. Try it: Create a revision cloud 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Revision Cloud.

Review the data displayed in the command window. You can display the following information for two points you specify: ■ ■ ■ ■ Distance between them in drawing units Angle between the points in the XY plane Angle of the points from the XY plane Delta. Use an object snap to locate a point on an object. or difference. Press F2 to see the data in a larger window called the Text window. Y. To get started Action Erase objects Extend objects Trim objects Copy objects in a drawing Copy objects between drawings Offset objects Mirror objects Move objects Rotate objects Fillet objects Edit properties Menu Modify ➤ Erase Modify ➤ Extend Modify ➤ Trim Modify ➤ Copy Edit ➤ Copy Modify ➤ Offset Modify ➤ Mirror Modify ➤ Move Modify ➤ Rotate Modify ➤ Fillet Tools ➤ Properties Modify ➤ Properties Toolbar Modify Modify Modify Modify Standard Modify Modify Modify Modify Modify Standard Analyze Drawings | 113 . between the X. Use DIST to quickly determine the relationship between two points.Analyze Drawings You can extract information from your model using the inquiry commands. The most commonly used one is the DIST command. and Z coordinate values of each point Try it: Find the distance and angle between two points 1 2 3 4 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance. Use another object snap to locate a point on a different object.

OPTIONS. EXTEND. MATCHPROP.To get started Action Match properties Create revision clouds Extract information from objects Menu Modify ➤ Match Properties Draw ➤ Revision Cloud Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance Toolbar Standard Draw Inquiry Help system ERASE. COPYCLIP. PROPERTIES. ROTATE. FILLET. REVCLOUD. OFFSET. DIST Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 5 What is the difference between a crossing selection and a window selection? What is the fastest way to create several parallel lines? What is the easiest way to create an arc that is tangent to two other objects? When creating or modifying an object. MIRROR. PASTECLIP. UNITS. what do you do to display the object snap menu? What is an easy way to find the distance between two points in a drawing? 114 | Chapter 7 Make Modifications . COPY. TRIM. MOVE.

.

These symbols. called blocks in AutoCAD LT. represent standard items such as trees or bushes Create blocks when you want to use drawings or parts of drawings repeatedly Hatch to fill areas with patterns or solid colors that help identify the subject matter or material .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Associative Hatches . 121 Use Standard Hatch Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Sources of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . 118 Insert Blocks . . . . . . . . . 121 Insert Hatches or Solid Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Define Hatch Boundaries. . . 119 Overview of Hatches . . . . 118 Benefits of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Tutorial: Add Hatches to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Add Symbols and Hatches Overview of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 . . . . . . . . . 119 Tutorial: Adding Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

■ Build a standard library of frequently used symbols. or symbol libraries. components. ■ Store associated data with block attributes which can be extracted to create reports. An entire drawing can also be inserted as a block. from which they can be inserted into other drawings. and on the World Wide Web. DesignCenter provides convenient organization and access to thousands of symbols on your computer. Numerous Autodesk and commercial symbol libraries containing thousands of blocks are available. a fastener. and performance ratings. dates. ■ Your computer.Overview of Blocks In AutoCAD LT. ■ Your company network. and copying blocks rather than individual geometric objects. or your company may already have its own standard libraries. ■ Manage blocks with DesignCenter. Sources of Blocks There are several sources of blocks that you can use in your drawings. block references of fastener inserted into a drawing block definition for fastener Blocks may also include block attributes. block attributes. ■ The World Wide Web. on your local network. which store data such as part numbers. relocating. Benefits of Blocks Using blocks makes it easier and faster to get your work done: ■ Create drawings efficiently by inserting. or standard parts. or block libraries are more advanced topics and are not covered in this guide. 118 | Chapter 8 Add Symbols and Hatches . including several that are available free by using the DC Online tab in DesignCenter. symbols are called blocks. AutoCAD LT provides over 300 standard blocks in 15 symbol library drawings in the DesignCenter folder. Blocks are typically defined and stored in drawings called block libraries. or a door. You can also create your own blocks and block libraries. A block is a collection of objects that are associated into a single object. NOTE Creating blocks. A block can be used to represent an object such as a tree.

Insert Blocks | 119 . Tutorial: Adding Blocks 1 Open MyDesign. Use tool palettes to organize and access your most commonly used blocks. Use a value for the offset distance that is appropriate for what you are creating. Locate symbol libraries and place or drag a block into a drawing or onto a tool palette. 2 Offset the lines to create walls (if it’s a health spa or motor housing) or ridges (if it’s a catch for a window lock). ■ Tool Palettes window. Place a block by specifying its insertion point. scale. and rotation angle. Use DesignCenter to locate and manage a large number of blocks and block libraries. ■ DesignCenter. Place or drag a block into a drawing. Clean up the corners using Fillet with the fillet radius set to 0. the drawing that you created and saved in a previous tutorial.Insert Blocks AutoCAD LT provides the following three methods for inserting blocks into drawings: ■ Insert dialog box.

Open a block library

1 Click Tools menu ➤ DesignCenter.
The DesignCenter window is divided into the tree view on the left side and the content area on the right side.

2 On the DesignCenter window, click the Folders tab if necessary. In the tree view, navigate to the
Help\Tutorials\Symbol Libraries folder.

3 Click the plus sign (+) on the block library that’s appropriate for your drawing:
■ ■ ■ ■ Fasteners - Metric.dwg Fasteners - US.dwg Office - Metric.dwg Office - US.dwg

4 Click the Blocks item under the drawing that you just expanded. The blocks become visible in
the Content area of DesignCenter. Place and relocate blocks with DesignCenter

1 Drag one of the blocks from DesignCenter into your drawing. The precise location is not
important.

2 Click the block. Notice the colored grip that displays. Drag the grip to move the block into place. 3 Click the grip and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click Rotate. Rotate the block either with
the cursor or by entering a rotation angle.

4 In DesignCenter, double-click a different block. 5 In the Insert dialog box, under Rotation, click Specify On-Screen. Click OK. 6 Click a location in your drawing. You are prompted to specify a rotation angle. Rotate the block
either with the cursor or by entering a rotation angle.

7 Close the DesignCenter window.
Place blocks with the Insert dialog box

1 Click Insert menu ➤ Block. 2 In the Insert dialog box, click the arrow next to the Name box. These are the block definitions
currently stored in your drawing. Click one of them and click OK. Specify the location for the block.

3 Add several more blocks to your drawing. Save the drawing.
Access block libraries from the Web

1 Open DesignCenter again. 2 Click the DC Online tab. If you have an Internet connection, you can explore the commercial
symbol libraries that are available.

120

|

Chapter 8

Add Symbols and Hatches

Overview of Hatches
A hatch pattern is a standard pattern of lines or dots used to highlight an area in a drawing, or to identify a material such as concrete, steel, or grass. In AutoCAD LT, a hatch pattern can also be a solid fill.

Use Standard Hatch Patterns
AutoCAD LT supplies more than 60 industry-standard ISO and imperial hatch patterns. You can use a pattern supplied with AutoCAD LT or one from an external pattern library. Hatch patterns are stored in hatch pattern files with PAT extensions.

ANSI31 INSUL AR-CONC

Industry-standard hatch patterns

Associative Hatches
By default, hatches are associative. Associative hatches are linked to their boundaries and are updated when the boundaries are modified. You can remove associativity from a hatch at any time.

Hatched object

Result of editing boundary with nonassociative hatch

Result of editing boundary with associative hatch

Insert Hatches or Solid Fills
You can hatch or fill objects in a drawing using one of these methods: ■ Choose Hatch from the Draw menu or toolbar to create hatches and solid fills. ■ Use DesignCenter to drag hatches into the drawing or onto a tool palette.

Overview of Hatches

|

121

■ Use a tool palette to drag commonly used hatches into a drawing quickly.

Define Hatch Boundaries
Hatch boundaries can be any combination of objects such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines, text, and blocks. Hatch boundaries must enclose an area, but they can include islands (enclosed areas within the hatch area) that you choose to hatch or leave unhatched.

internal point

islands

Internal point selected

Boundaries detected

Result

Tutorial: Add Hatches to a Drawing
In this tutorial, you will hatch part of your drawing to look something like this:

1 Open MyDesign, the drawing that you created and saved in the previous tutorial. 2 Click Draw menu ➤ Hatch. 3 On the Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, notice the name of the hatch pattern and the swatch.
Choose a different hatch pattern.

4 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. Then click anywhere between the parallel lines for the
walls and press ENTER.

122

|

Chapter 8

Add Symbols and Hatches

and the hatch spacing. 6 7 8 9 Press ESC to return to the dialog box. 10 Click Preview. Click the > (More Options) button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog box. Under Islands. including the circle being hatched. If the hatch is too dense. click Preview. Under Angle and Scale. BLOCK. change the values for the angle and for the scale. right-click or press 11 Save your drawing file. ENTER to accept the hatch. click Outer.5 At the bottom of the dialog box. Otherwise. To get started Action Insert a blocks Open DesignCenter Open the Tool Palettes window Hatch an area Menu Insert ➤ Block Tools ➤ DesignCenter Tools ➤ Tool Palettes Window Draw ➤ Hatch Tools ➤ DesignCenter Tools ➤ Tool Palettes Window Toolbar Draw Standard Standard Draw Standard Help system ADCENTER. TOOLPALETTES. Then click the < (Less Options) button. increase the value for the scale by a factor of 10. INSERT. HATCH Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 5 What is a block? What is a block library? How can you use object snaps with blocks? What are three ways to hatch an area in a drawing? How do you fill an area with a solid color? Insert Hatches or Solid Fills | 123 . return to step 6. There are probably several things that you’ll want to change. EXPLODE. the hatch angle. If the hatch is still not acceptable.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Add Text to a Drawing Create and Modify Text . . . . . . . . 126 Work with Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Create and Modify Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Set Text Size in Model Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

you define the width of the text by specifying the two opposite corners of a text boundary. you can choose formatting that affects the entire text object or only selected text. you can easily change the width by dragging the right side of the ruler. display menu options display ruler first-line indent tab stops save changes and close paragraph indent ruler set width of multiline text objects With the In-Place Text Editor. This opens the In-Place Text Editor and displays the text to be changed.Create and Modify Text AutoCAD LT provides a text editor to add text to drawings. You can also control indents. The In-Place Text Editor displays the bounding box with a ruler at the top and the Text Formatting toolbar. 126 | Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing . Only the width of the box has an effect. AutoCAD LT inserts the text you enter in the dialog box within this limit and wraps words that don’t fit to the next line. Before creating the text. When using the text editor. NOTE The fastest way to make changes to an existing text object is to double-click it.

Additional features that are available for text in drawings include ■ A spell checker with customizable dictionaries ■ The Find and Replace dialog box for locating and correcting text ■ The ability to create mirrored text Try it: Create multiline text objects 1 2 3 4 5 6 Start a new drawing. 2 Highlight more words or the entire paragraph and click more formatting options. Create and Modify Text | 127 . To display the text at a convenient size. Highlight a word and click some of the formatting options. Click two points to determine the width of the text object. zoom into a small area above the title block. 3 Click OK on the Text Formatting toolbar. In the In-Place Text Editor. These options are nearly identical with those in word processing applications. type your text. Click Draw menu ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text. Try it: Modify an existing text object 1 Double-click the text object. 7 Click OK on the Text Formatting toolbar.

you use the Text Style dialog box. When you create or modify a text style. AutoCAD LT uses the current text style. no scaling is necessary. NOTE If you create notes and labels directly on a layout in paper space. change its name. choose a different text style specify a different text font to be used by the text style create a new text style sample text shows the changes you make If you change an existing style’s font. you can modify its settings. all text in the drawing that uses that style is regenerated using the new font. which determines the following properties: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Font controls the shapes of the characters Font style controls the italic and boldface formatting for TrueType fonts Height controls the size in drawing units of the text Obliquing angle controls the forward or backward slant of the text Orientation controls the vertical or horizontal alignment of single-line text Other text characteristics controls effects such as wide text and backwards text Create and Modify Text Styles Except for the default STANDARD style. Once you’ve created a style. Notes and labels created in model space must be sized to accommodate the scale of the layout viewport. or delete it when you no longer need it. you must define any text style that you want to use.Work with Text Styles All text in an AutoCAD LT drawing has a text style associated with it. When you enter text. 128 | Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing .

■ Example 2: If the desired text size is 1/8 inch and the viewport scale is 1”=4’ (1:48). Text Text Help system FIND.Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling With AutoCAD LT. SCALETEXT. JUSTIFYTEXT. tables. The space in which you create text depends on the circumstances. you can create text either in model space or on the layout in paper space. then use 3/0. creating text directly on the layout is much easier because no scaling is required. ■ If the text is more closely associated with the model. Set Text Size in Model Space Set the text size in model space using the following formula: Text size in model space = desired text size/scale of the layout viewport ■ Example 1: If the desired text size is 3 mm and the viewport scale is 1:4 (0. STYLE. ■ If the text is more closely associated with the layout. With this option. and general notes. Obviously.25). SPELL. STYLE. MTEXTED. and you anticipate referencing the model and the text from other drawings or other views. It is recommended that you create view-specific text in model space. you must size it for correct display and plotting in paper space. you should create the text in paper space. and labels in paper space. If you create text in model space. the text must usually be scaled.25 = 12 mm for the text size in model space. To get started Action Create multiline text Modify text Check the spelling in a drawing Find and replace text Creating text styles Menu Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text Tools ➤ Spelling Edit ➤ Find Format ➤ Text Style Text Text Toolbar Draw. MIRRTEXT. you should create the text in model space. MTEXT. Preparing one or more views on a drawing layout usually involves displaying them in layout viewports at various scales other than 1:1. SPACETRANS Set Text Size for the Viewport Scaling | 129 . then use (1/8)/(1/48) = 48/8 = 6 inches for the text size in model space. there are no scaling considerations and you create the text at its full size (1:1). With this option.

5 mm and the display scale of the layout viewport is 1/50 (0.Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 What is the fastest way to open the In-Place Text Editor when you need to change existing text? What are some advantages to creating additional text styles? How do you decide whether to create text in paper space or in model space? What text height should you use in model space if the desired text height in paper space is 2.02)? 130 | Chapter 9 Add Text to a Drawing .

.

Quick Leader Angular Diameter Radius Ordinate Aligned Center Mark Linear (Horizontal) Baseline Linear (Vertical) Continued .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Create Leaders with Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Parts of a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Associative Dimensions and Leaders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Tutorial: Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Modify Dimensions . . . . 135 Use Dimensioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Create Center Marks and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Create and Modify Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Add Dimensions Dimensions Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

leaders can be created automatically when dimension text won’t fit between extension lines. Several types of arrowheads are available. You can also create leader lines to connect text or a block with a feature. Indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. the arrowhead and the leader portion of the leader object are also updated. Alternatively. vertical. Measures the angle formed by two lines or three points. AutoCAD LT creates associative dimensions. and an arrowhead. ■ Leader. ■ If a leader object is associated with a geometric object. Depending on the dimension style. For angles. and continued (chain) dimensions. Parts of a Dimension Dimensions have several distinct elements: ■ Dimension line. including architectural ticks and dots. Leader objects are composed of text. Measures the distance of a point from a specified origin point. AutoCAD LT offers four general types of dimensions: ■ Linear. ■ Extension line. the dimension line is an arc. or scaled. Reflects dimension value and may include prefixes. ■ If the text portion of a leader object is moved. baseline (parallel). ■ Arrowhead. dimension text arrowhead dimension line extension line leader Associative Dimensions and Leaders By default. the distances or angles between objects. stretched. and tolerances. the leader line is also adjusted. Extends from the feature being dimensioned to the dimension line. rotated. a leader line. or the location of a feature.Dimensions Overview Dimensions show the geometric measurements of objects. Indicates an end of the dimension line. The measurements displayed by associative dimensions are updated automatically as you modify the objects with which they are associated. ■ Dimension text. Measures the radii and diameters of arcs and circles. suffixes. 134 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions . ■ Angular. Measures distances using horizontal. and the object is moved. you can supply your own text or suppress the text entirely. ■ Ordinate. Forms a solid line leading from an annotation to the referenced feature. ■ Radial. aligned.

The extension line origin points can be on separate objects.Create Dimensions You can dimension lines. arcs. 2 1 1 2 Result of selecting a line for a dimension Result of selecting a circle for a dimension ■ Use object snaps to specify the extension line origins. 1 Open MyDesign. the drawing that you created and saved in previous tutorials. you will set the scale for your drawing and add several dimensions to your design. circles. and several other types of objects. 2 Click the layout tab near the bottom-left of the application window. Create Dimensions | 135 . There are two primary methods for creating dimensions: ■ Select an object to dimension (1) and specify the dimension line location (2) as shown in the following examples. Tutorial: Create Dimensions In this tutorial. and then specify the dimension line location.

You are now accessing model space from the layout. 4 Double-click inside the layout viewport. Add dimensions 1 Change the current layer to the Dimensions layer. 5 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Extents. You can always choose a different scale if necessary.Set the display scale of the viewport. 136 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions . click Display Locked and then No. 3 Click Dimension menu ➤ Linear. When you dimension in model space from the layout tab. the dimensions are automatically scaled relative to the viewport scale. Click the one that seems the most appropriate for the sheet size and the size of your floor plan or part. 7 Click the blue layout viewport border to select it. under Misc. click Standard Scale. On the Properties palette. 2 Double-click inside the layout viewport to access model space. 2 Click Modify ➤ Properties. This step centers your view. Follow the prompts to create several linear dimensions. 1 Click the blue layout viewport border to select it. Note It is strongly recommended that you keep the display in layout viewports locked unless you’re setting the display scale of the viewport. 6 Double-click outside the layout viewport to return to paper space. It is a good practice to use a separate layer reserved for dimension objects. You can now specify the precise scale for the floor plan or part. This prevents you or someone else from accidentally zooming in or out and changing the display scale. 9 Lock the layout viewport. There is a good reason why you are creating dimensions from the layout tab rather than the Model tab. 3 On the Properties palette. 8 Click the arrow to display a list of scales.

Change the current layer to the Text layer.4 Experiment with several other types of dimensions. Check the Help system topic on DIMSCALE for more information. Save your drawing. Create Dimensions | 137 . You can enter DIMSCALE on the command line. Add Text 1 2 3 4 Double-click outside the layout viewport to return to paper space. Create several notes using multiline text. It works only when the system variable DIMSCALE is set to 0. NOTE Automatic dimension scaling is not turned on in all drawings or drawing template files.

■ Leader lines connect annotation to drawing features. 3 Click Dimension ➤ Center mark and click the circle.Use Dimensioning Options In addition to the basic types of dimensions. Create Center Marks and Lines You can easily create a center mark or centerline on a circle or arc. profile. AutoCAD LT provides these options on the Dimension menu and toolbar: ■ Center marks and centerlines locate the exact center of circles or arcs. You can also create center marks with the radius and diameter dimensions. The size and style of center marks and centerlines are controlled by the dimension style. centerlines center mark Try it: Create center marks and lines 1 Start a new drawing and click the Model tab. ■ Geometric tolerances show deviations of form. location. orientation. Two lines in the shape of a plus are created at the center of the circle. 138 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions . and runout of drawing features. 2 Draw a small circle.

Use Dimensioning Options | 139 . Leader annotations can be multiline text. pressing ENTER . or a block reference. 2 1 hook line leader line The simple leader in the example was created by specifying the From (1) and To (2) points of the leader. Leader color. and then entering the leader text. Leaders can be straight line segments or smooth spline curves.Create Leaders with Annotation You can create a leader from any point or feature in a drawing. scale. and arrowhead style are controlled by the current dimension style. a feature control frame. A small line known as a hook line usually connects the annotation to the leader line.

the same set of options are available: ■ Lines sets the appearance and behavior of dimension lines and extension lines. A dimension style defines ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Format and position of dimension lines. Regardless of whether you choose New. position. Overrides apply to all subsequent dimensions created with that style until you make a new style current. and behavior of dimension text Rules governing text placement and dimension lines Overall dimension scale Format and precision of primary. Dimension styles also make changing dimension formats and behavior easy. extension lines. arrowheads.Create and Modify Dimension Styles Every dimension has a dimension style associated with it. and centerlines. Dimension styles help you establish and enforce drafting standards. The default STANDARD style is assigned to dimensions until you set another style as current. or Override in the Dimension Style Manager. placement. center marks. They do not permanently modify a dimension style. and angular dimension units Format and precision of tolerance values New dimensions use the current settings in the Dimension Style Manager dialog box. Modify. ■ Symbols and Arrows sets the appearance and behavior of dimension arrowheads. You can also override properties of dimensions using the Properties palette. and alignment. ■ Text sets the dimension text appearance. 140 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions . and center marks Appearance. alternate. Overrides allow for style modifications to the current dimension style.

both metric and imperial units. ■ Primary Units sets the format (for example. and text. ■ Tolerances sets tolerance values and precision. Create and Modify Dimension Styles | 141 . scientific. It is important that your organization creates and maintains one or more official dimension styles. It also includes the setting for automatic dimension scaling. for example. ■ Alternate Units sets alternate unit format and precision. extension lines.■ Fit sets options governing placement of dimension lines. decimal. This feature supports dual dimensions that display. architectural) and precision of linear and angular dimension units. NOTE Creating a dimension style to conform with industry or company standards requires agreement on over 70 settings.

2 Click grip on dimension text 3 Move grip to relocate dimension text 1 Click dimension To get started Action Create linear dimensions Menu Dimension ➤ Linear Toolbar Create aligned dimensions Dimension ➤ Aligned Create ordinate dimensions Dimension ➤ Ordinate 142 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions . as discussed in the previous topic. For significant modifications to a dimension. it is usually easier to erase and re-create the dimension. 2 Click grip at end of dimension line 3 Move grip to new dimension location 1 Click dimension You can also drag dimension text to a different location. you can easily drag a dimension line to align it with another dimension line.Modify Dimensions You can modify dimensions with grips or with the AutoCAD LT editing commands. The easiest way to make minor modifications in a dimension is to use grips. You can also modify or override dimension styles. For example.

DIMORDINATE. DIMSTYLE. DIMEDIT. DIMSTYLE. DIMOVERRIDE.To get started Action Create radius dimensions Menu Dimension ➤ Radius Toolbar Create diameter dimensions Dimension ➤ Diameter Create angular dimensions Dimension ➤ Angular Create baseline dimensions Dimension ➤ Baseline Create continued dimensions Dimension ➤ Continue Create and modify a dimension style Update an existing dimension to reflect a style change Create a center mark Dimension ➤ Dimension Style Dimension ➤ Update Dimension ➤ Center mark Create leaders with annotation Dimension ➤ Leader Help system DIMALIGNED. DIMJOGGED. DIMTEDIT. DIMRADIUS. DIMREGEN Modify Dimensions | 143 . DIMCONTINUE. DIMCENTER. DIMLINEAR. DIMANGULAR. QLEADER. DIMSCALE. DIMBASELINE. DIMDIAMETER.

Review and Recall 1 What is the behavior of associative leaders and associative dimensions? 2 Why should you lock layout viewports? 3 To ensure that dimensions are scaled according to the layout viewport scale. what dimension variable should be set to 0? 4 What is the easiest way to modify the location of a dimension feature such as the dimension line or dimension text? 144 | Chapter 10 Add Dimensions .

.

Text and dimensions in model space are scaled to compensate for the scale factors used in layout viewports Layout viewports Display one or more views of the model. each of which can be scaled separately Plot styles Temporaily override properties such as color and lineweight when plotting Page Setups Save plot settings by name and associate them with a layout Layout Represents a drawing sheet that includes a title block.The model Created at full size (1:1). and text objects . one or more layout viewports.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Use Plot Styles to Override Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Change a Plotter Configuration. . . . 149 Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . 154 . . . . . . 149 Choose and Configure Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Use Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Tutorial: Work with Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Create a New Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Tutorial: Plot a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Create Layouts and Plots Work with Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Page Setups. . . . . . . . 152 Plot from a Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Add a Plotter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Once you create a layout. 148 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . displays a view of model space Create a New Layout The two most common reasons for creating a new layout are ■ Creating a new drawing template file that includes a different paper size and orientation. you can replace the title block and create or delete layout viewports.Work with Layouts You use a layout to compose the plotted page. The page size and actual printing area depend on the printer or plotter assigned to the layout. orientation. ■ Adding a layout with a different paper size. layout tab printable area page border layout viewport. and title block to an existing drawing. The easiest way to create a new layout is to use the Create Layout wizard. A layout typically includes the following objects: ■ General notes and tables ■ View-specific label blocks and callout blocks (this is an advanced topic not covered in this guide) ■ Layout viewports Layouts show the page border and actual printing area.

find the /Help/Tutorials folder in the AutoCAD LT installation folder and open arbor. Tutorial: Work with Layout Viewports In this tutorial. The blue borders of the layout viewports are now visible. Notice that the Properties palette contains the property settings for the layout viewport. a single layout viewport is added by default. enter model space from the layout tab and then dimension the model. 3 In the Layer Properties Manager. 4 Click Modify menu ➤ Properties. under Files of Type. ■ To display and scale views of model space in a layout. enter a new name for the layout. The following points summarize the relationship of layout viewports and model space: ■ The majority of the objects in your drawings are created in model space on the Model tab. Click OK.dwg. In the Save Drawing As dialog box. Each viewport can have its own scale. plot properties. ■ For any significant editing of your drawing. specify a DWT extension. ■ You can control the visibility of layers separately in each layout viewport. On the shortcut menu. Then click the blue border of the upper-right layout viewport. In the Rename Layout dialog box. Create and Modify Layout Viewports When you create a new layout. Use Layout Viewports Layout viewports on a layout tab display views of model space. you will practice the most common operations used with layout viewports.Try it: Create a layout 1 Start a new drawing. click Rename. 3 Follow the steps in the wizard to create a layout with a different paper size and matching title block. use the Model tab. Change the display scale of a view in a layout viewport 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Right-click the layout tab. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Wizards ➤ Create Layout. and layer visibility settings. you create layout viewports. click the lightbulb icon on the Viewport layer to display the objects on that layer. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save this drawing as a new drawing template file. Work with Layouts | 149 . ■ To create correctly scaled dimensions. ■ You enter model space through a layout viewport primarily to pan the view and to set layer visibility. Click OK. You can add more layout viewports for independent views such as details and 3D views. 2 In the Select File dialog box.

you will change the precise scale of the view displayed in this layout viewport. Notice that the view changes immediately to reflect the new display scale. and erased. 9 Use the Properties palette to lock the layout viewport. The new layout viewport can overlap an existing viewport. You lock the layout viewport to prevent accidental panning and zooming in it. 4 Click the border of the layout viewport to display its grips. A layout viewport is an object. 7 Double-click within the layout viewport and pan the view. 2 Click View menu ➤ Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport. moving the cursor. Then double-click anywhere outside the layout viewports to return to Paper Space. Click the arrow and click No. When you are ready to plot. Thus. 6 Use the Properties palette to set the display scale of the view in the layout viewport. 9 Turn the Viewport layer off. Move the layout viewport with the Move command. Create a new layout viewport 1 Make the Viewport layer the current layer. 8 Use the Properties palette to lock the layout viewport. 8 Double-click inside the layout viewport to enter Model Space. Double-click outside of all viewports to return to paper space. 3 Click two points in a blank area on the layout. 7 Click the arrow to display a list of scales and click 1:40. Pan the view as needed. click Display Locked. Next. the view position and scale in the viewport are protected. 150 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . but do not change the view scale with Zoom. turn off the layer to prevent the viewport borders from being plotted. The display properties for the layout viewport are now unlocked. 10 Close the drawing without saving it.5 In the Properties palette. 2 Click the border of the upper-right layout viewport and press ENTER. NOTE Make sure that you create layout viewports on their own layer. it can be moved. Erase a layout viewport 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase. and clicking a new location. copied. 6 In the Properties palette. under Misc. The two points are the diagonal corners of the new layout viewport. Like other objects. click Standard Scale. 5 Adjust the size of the layout viewport by clicking a grip.

You can also configure drivers to save drawings in several file formats. you can easily add or edit printer and plotter configurations.pc3 extension and are stored in the Plotters folder. including ■ ■ ■ ■ Whether the plotter is attached to your computer or on a network The type of plotter. PostScript files for use with page layout programs. and which port to use Choose and Configure Plotters | 151 . Plotter configuration files can also be created for Windows® system printers if you want the program to use default properties different from those used by Windows. Formats include DWF™ (Design Web Format) files to view drawings in a web browser or external viewer. click File menu ➤ Plotter Manager. To display the Plotters folder. double-click the Add-A-Plotter wizard in the Plotter Manager. If an output device is not listed in the Plot or Page Setup dialog boxes. The Add-A-Plotter wizard prompts you for information about your plotter. The Plotter Manager The Plotter Manager includes plotter configuration (PC3) files for every nonsystem printer that you install. Many plotters that do not have Windows drivers (nonsystem plotters) can be configured for use with AutoCAD LT using drivers provided either by Autodesk or by the plotter manufacturer. deleting. Devices with a Windows printer driver installed are available automatically when you plot unless the plotting option to hide system printers has been selected. To add a plotter configuration. including manufacturer and model Whether to use a plotter configuration file from previous versions of the product Whether to output to a computer port or file.Choose and Configure Plotters AutoCAD LT supports a wide range of printers and plotters. and raster files. and changing plotter configurations. Plotter configuration files have a . Add a Plotter Configuration The Plotter Manager is a folder that provides a method for adding. or if its settings are incorrect.

stb. and edit plot style tables. Plot styles are assigned directly to objects and layers. You can access the Plot Style Manager from the Files menu. For example. copy.ctb. Use the Plot Style Manager to add. Only the appearance of plotted objects is affected. Use Plot Styles to Override Properties A plot style is an optional method to control how each object or layer is plotted. The files have the extension . Change a Plotter Configuration The Plotter Configuration Editor is used to ■ ■ ■ ■ Edit the port or file output information Change or add paper sizes and layouts Control vector and raster graphic output Calibrate your plotter Set any of your plotter’s custom propertiesTo start the Plotter Configuration Editor. The files have the extension . The Plot Style Manager is a folder that contains all the available plot style tables and the Add-A-Plot Style wizard. Instead. There are two types of plot style tables: ■ Color-dependent plot style tables.50 mm lineweight. you change its color. Using them enables each object in a drawing to be plotted differently. An object’s color determines how it is plotted. the plotter configuration is available for layouts and plotting. independent of its color. Plot style tables collect groups of plot styles and save them in a file that you can later specify when plotting. delete. all red objects in a drawing can be set to plot with a 0. 152 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . either doubleclick the PC3 file or choose Properties in the Plot dialog box.■ Raster and vector graphics quality settings ■ Custom properties that depend on the plotter type ■ A unique name for the new plotter configuration Once a new PC3 file is created. Assigning a plot style to an object or layer overrides properties such as color and lineweight for plotting. to control how an object is plotted. rename. You cannot assign color-dependent plot styles directly to objects. ■ Named plot style tables.

In the Plot dialog box. 3 Click New. 2 Click File menu ➤ Page Setup Manager. When you are ready to plot. Page setups are saved in the drawing. If necessary. If the image is not correct. Try it: Create a page setup 1 Start a new drawing. you can name and save them as a page setup using the Page Setup Manager. click a layout tab. make changes to the plot settings. Page Setups To manage plot settings. page setup. To switch back. and the plot style table attached to the layout. you select the printer or plotter and many other settings. Each layout tab can have an associated named page setup.Plot from a Layout After you have completed your drawing. you are ready to plot. Plot from a Layout | 153 . it is a good practice to generate a full plot preview. For example. you can specify the name of the page setup in the Plot dialog box. You can quickly restore all settings associated with that plotter by specifying the name of a previously saved page setup. you can specify the name of the original page setup. let’s say you switch to a different plotter for color output. specify a plot style select a printer or a plotter select a page size select the area of the drawing to plot generate a preview position the layout on the page display or hide options specify a plot scale select a page orientation Before you plot your drawing.

The My_New_Plotter page setup is now associated with the current layout tab. Click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Page Setup Manager. Create a new layout 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Wizards ➤ Create Layout. The Create Layout wizard guides you through the creation of a layout. click Modify. insert a title block into the new layout. 5 Change some settings in the Page Setup dialog box. create a new layout. 2 In the Select File dialog box. set up a viewport. 154 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . 10 Click the Model tab. and create dimensions.4 In the New Page Setup dialog box. 9 Click Close to close the Page Setup Manager. 8 Select Display Plot Styles. 7 Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments). If prompted. The new page setup name is displayed in the Page Setup Manager. Click OK. Click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Click Close. This is a drawing of a floor plan and elevation. 6 In the Page Setup Manager. open the drop-down list and click the monochrome. If you don’t specify all the settings in the Page Setup dialog box when you create a layout. 4 Click the Elevation layout tab. The Elevation layout uses a page setup that defines the plot area and page size. Edit an existing layout To prepare for plotting from a layout tab. enter My_New_Plotter.ctb file. choose not to apply the plot style table to all other layouts. Tutorial: Plot a Drawing In this exercise. and plot the drawing. you can set up the page just before you plot. locate the \Help\Tutorials folder and select plan. 3 Click Open.dwg. 6 Click My_New_Plotter and click Set Current. Note that the model is still displayed in color. you edit the page setup for an existing layout. The drawing is now black and white because the layout shows a preview of the drawing as it will be plotted with the monochrome plot style table. A specific plotter configuration is also associated with the Elevation layout. you set up a layout.

Click Next. specify 2 rows with 1 column.0 inches) for the paper size. Click Next. enter a name for the new layout. click and drag to create a rectangular layout viewport that is just inside the printable area (the dashed lines).) 7 On the Define Viewports page. 6 On the Title Block page. (You insert a title block once the layout is created. select the Array option. 9 On the Finish page. Type Elevation and Floor Plan. Click Next.5 inches. or CDs. In the Columns box. project websites. Notice that two viewports have been created. type 1. 8 On the Pick Location page. vertically aligned. you will plot the drawing to a DWF file rather than to a plotter. 3 On the Printer page.) In the Rows box.1. with a gap between them. Select DWF6 ePlot. Leave the Viewport Scale as Scaled to Fit. In the Spacing Between Rows box. and provide greater resolution than other popular options. Click Next. This creates two viewports. type 0. (You change the scale later. click None from the list of available title blocks. They can be viewed using the free Autodesk® DWF Viewer. click Portrait for that orientation. Click Next. 5 On the Orientation page. type 2.2 In the Create Layout wizard. type 0.0 inches and a height of 8. Click Next.pc3.25. Select Letter or ANSI A (8. In the Spacing Between Columns box. Plot from a Layout | 155 . select the printer that you want to use to plot this layout. click Finish to complete the creation of the new layout and viewports. on the Begin page. DWF (Design Web Format) files are convenient for distributing drawings using email. FTP sites. DWF files are smaller. Make sure that Paper Size in Units lists a width of 11. faster. the paper sizes available in the list are based on the printer that you selected. click Array. For this tutorial.5 × 11. under Viewport Setup. In the drawing area. select Select Location. 4 On the Paper Size page.

you pan the view. 3 In the Properties palette. clear the Specify On-screen check box. 5 Under Scale. Click Insert menu ➤ Block. Under Insertion Point. 156 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . Y. The Z box should be 0. you change the zoom magnification of the view. click Layer and select the Viewports layer from the drop-down list.Insert a title block into a layout 1 2 3 4 Make sure that you are on the Elevation and Floor Plan layout tab. click Properties. and Z boxes. in the Name list. To change the portion of the model space drawing displayed in the viewport without changing the scale. 2 On the Modify menu. 1 Select both of the viewports by clicking their borders. in the Angle box. in the X and Y boxes. clear the Specify On-screen check box. in the X. type 0 to keep the title block horizontal. type 0. In the Insert dialog box. 7 Click OK.0. click Letter (portrait). Then.4. clear the Specify On-screen check box. Then. Set up the viewports to plot Now that the layout viewports have been created. you specify the scale of the model space view displayed in each viewport. To change the scale of a viewport. the layout to be plotted full scale. type 1 to set 6 Under Rotation. Then.

10 Double-click anywhere outside the viewports to return to paper space. The plotter you chose in the wizard is still selected. In the Plot column. Then lock both viewports. click Portrait. Click OK. Pan the image in the viewport until only the elevation view is displayed. click Extents. Click OK to close the Plot dialog box and plot the drawing to the DWF file. 4 Under Plot Area. Plot the layout Now that you have created a layout and have prepared the layout viewports for plotting. select the monochrome. press ESC. Under Plot Offset. 6 Double-click inside the top viewport to switch to model space. 7 Click inside the bottom viewport to make it current. click the Standard Scale box and select 3/32"=1' from the drop-down list of scales. 9 In the Layer Properties Manager.4 In the Properties palette. in the Name list. select the Viewports layer. Alternatively. 2 If necessary. 3 Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments). click the Plot/No Plot icon to turn off plotting for the Viewport layer. Pan the image in the viewport until only the floor plan is displayed. you are ready to plot the drawing. 5 The model space objects are scaled correctly for plotting at 3/32"=1' (1:128). you could have turned off the Viewport layer. Under Plot Scale. in the Name column. Plotting is turned off for the viewport borders. 8 Click Format menu ➤ Layer. set the scale of the plot to 1:1. This option plots all objects on the layout tab regardless of location. Plot from a Layout | 157 . click Center the Plot. 5 6 7 8 Under Drawing Orientation. You could now send the DWF file to a client for review with the Autodesk DWF Viewer. but the objects displayed in the viewport are still plotted. After previewing the plot. click the > button at the bottom-right corner of the Plot dialog box to display more plot options. 1 Click File menu ➤ Plot.ctb file. which is available free on the Autodesk website. Click Preview at the bottom of the dialog box.

OPTIONS. PAGESETUP. To get started Action Create a new layout Create a layout viewport Scale a view in a layout viewport Add a plotter or modify a plotter configuration Override properties when plotting Restore saved settings for plotting Plot a layout Menu Insert ➤ Layout View ➤ Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport Tools ➤ Properties File ➤ Plotter Manager File ➤ Plot Style Manager File ➤ Page Setup Manager Layouts File ➤ Plot Standard Toolbar Layouts Layouts or Viewports Viewports Help system LAYOUT. PLOTSTYLE. MVIEW. CONVERTCTB Review and Recall 1 2 3 4 5 What types of objects are commonly found on a layout tab? How do you specify the scale of a layout viewport? How do you turn off the display of layout viewport borders? How can you use a plot style table? What is a fast way to save plot settings by name? 158 | Chapter 11 Create Layouts and Plots . PLOTSTAMP. LAYOUTWIZARD. In the Save Drawing As dialog box. PLOTTERMANAGER. STYLESMANAGER.9 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and then click Save. PLOT. CONVERTPSTYLES. enter Plan Complete in the File Name box.

A collection of data items. See also exploded dimension. tolerances. such as an arrowhead.Glossary Commands associated with definitions are shown in parentheses at the end of the definition. arranged so a computer can examine the collection and retrieve data with the key. (ARRAY) 2. Attribute data can be extracted from a drawing and inserted into external files. extension lines. Attribute values can be predefined or specified when the block is inserted. and radians. user coordinate system (UCS). (BHATCH) An object that is included in a block definition to store alphanumeric data about the block. Multiple copies of selected objects in a rectangular or polar (radial) pattern. or notes. slash. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. A dimension that measures angles or arc segments and consists of text. A dimension that measures the distance between two points at any angle. dimensions. at the end of a dimension line showing where a dimension begins and ends. Term absolute coordinates Definition Coordinate values measured from a coordinate system’s origin point. Angular units can be measured in decimal degrees. each identified by a subscript or key. symbols. To specify an angle override. or dot. enter a left angle bracket (<) followed by an angle whenever a command prompts you to specify a point. A dimension that automatically adapts as the associated geometry is modified. degrees/minutes/seconds. world coordinates. 1. (DIMANGULAR) The unit of measurement for an angle. The dimension line is parallel to the line connecting the dimension’s definition points. A terminator. Hatching that conforms to its bounding objects such that modifying the bounding objects automatically adjusts the hatch. and world coordinate system (WCS). grads. (ATTDEF) aligned dimension angle override angular dimension angular unit annotation array arrowhead associative dimension associative hatching attribute definition . Text. and leaders. (DIMALIGNED) Locks the cursor for the next point entered. relative coordinates. See also origin.

Also called chain dimension. (BLOCK) A generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create a single object. the grip that changes to a solid color when selected to specify the focus of the subsequent editing operation. A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype associated with its layer. moving. Also called instance. See also block definition and block reference. A compound object that is inserted in a drawing and displays the data stored in a block definition. 2. See also block and block definition.Term Auto-hide Definition A palette setting that causes palettes to hide automatically when the cursor moves off of it and to open automatically when the cursor moves onto its title bar. A shortcut for a command. Commonly used for either block definition or block reference. and rotating objects. A text area that displays the command line and a history of prompts and messages. The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block definitions. base point. In the context of editing grips. You define aliases in the PGP file. The insertion base point of the current drawing. See also BYBLOCK. prompts. (BASE) 4. baseline dimensions base point block block definition block definition table block instance block reference B-spline curve BYBLOCK BYLAYER command alias command line command window continued dimension crosshairs 160 | Glossary . CP is an alias for COPY. Also called parallel dimensions. (SPLINE) A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype of any block containing it. A type of linear dimension that uses the second extension line origin of a selected dimension as its first extension line origin. A point for relative distance and angle when copying. Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. For example. See also BYLAYER. 3. See block reference. (DIMCONTINUE) A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect. (INSERT) A blended piecewise polynomial curve passing near a given set of control points. and messages. 1. The insertion base point for a block definition. and Z is an alias for ZOOM. (BLOCK) The name. and set of objects that are combined and stored in the symbol table of a drawing. See also block and block reference. breaking one long dimension into shorter segments that add up to the total measurement. A text area reserved for keyboard input.

See also window selection. depending on the size of the application window and on how many toolbars and other elements are displayed. and inserts content. A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings. A color-dependent plot style table. (ADCENTER) Identifies an individual or an organization through a digital ID (certificate). (DIMSTYLE) The measurement value of dimensioned objects. one mile. and enables you to validate (verify the authenticity of) a file. The size of the drawing area varies. See crosshairs. Depending on the drawing. See shortcut menu. one kilometer. and external references (xrefs). and settings that control dimensioning features. The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block definitions. (SIGVALIDATE) A named group of dimension settings that determines the appearance of the dimension and simplifies the setting of dimension system variables. or some other distance. Browses. finds. which includes blocks. The unit of measurement that is used in a drawing. one millimeter. one drawing unit may equal one inch. positioned on the screen to display the largest possible view of all objects. digital signature dimension style dimension text dimension variables direct distance entry drawing area drawing extents drawing limits drawing template file drawing units Glossary | 161 . text strings. (ZOOM) See grid limits. A predefined value for a program input or parameter. A set of numeric values. hatches. Default values and options are denoted by angle brackets (<>). The smallest rectangle that contains all objects in a drawing. Drawing template files have a DWT extension. (DIMSTYLE) A method to specify a second point by first moving the cursor to indicate direction and then entering a distance. and previews content. The area in which your drawings are displayed and modified.Term crossing selection cursor cursor menu CTB file default definition table DesignCenter Definition A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its borders.

A drawing file referenced by another drawing. punctuation marks. and layers are not considered geometry. For drawing template. and DXF. (LAYER) All graphical objects such as lines. See drawing area. (EXPLODE) See drawing extents. A character set. such as linetypes. Nongraphical objects. See also DWG. DWT DXF explode extents external reference (xref) fill floating viewports font freeze geometry graphics area graphics screen grid grid limits Grip modes 162 | Glossary . circles. See also named object. See also block. and DWT. For drawing interchange format. Grid dots are not plotted. DWT. See also grid limits. and dimensions. scaling. lineweights. A setting that suppresses the display of objects on selected layers. or plotted. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed. Freezing layers shortens regenerating time. See also thaw. See drawing area. The block reference is replaced by the components of the block. To disassemble a complex object. DWF files are easy to publish and view on the Web. In the case of a block. arcs. which includes letters. block definition. A highly compressed file format that is created from a DWG file. into simpler objects. (FILL) See layout viewports. numbers. regenerated. rotating. (XREF) A solid color covering an area bounded by lines or curves. Also called drawing limits. See also DWF. text styles. and symbols of a distinctive proportion and design. or polyline. See also DWG. and block reference. An ASCII or binary file format of an AutoCAD drawing file for exporting drawings to other applications or for importing drawings from other applications. The spacing between grid dots is adjustable. A drawing file that contains standard settings to be used when creating new drawings. such as a block. moving.Term DWF Definition For Design Web Format. dimension. polylines. and mirroring. (GRID) The user-defined rectangular boundary of the drawing area covered by dots when the grid is turned on. (LIMITS) The editing capabilities activated when grips are displayed on an object: stretching. the block definition is unchanged. An area covered with regularly spaced dots to aid drawing. DWG.

To create a new version of an existing object by reflecting it symmetrically with respect to a prescribed line or plane. See also paper space. A method by which a drawing file can be dragged from a web page and inserted into another drawing. An enclosed area within a hatched area.or three-dimensional representation of an object. See lineweight. (VPORTS) See grid limits. a continuous line has a different linetype than a dashed line. You can view layers individually or in combination. See also paper space. See linetype. (LAYER) The tabbed environment in which you create and design paper space layout viewports to be plotted. a geometric model is placed in a three-dimensional coordinate space called model space. For example. Also called line font. (LINETYPE) A width value that can be assigned to all graphical objects except TrueType® fonts and raster images. After selecting the grip. (MSPACE) i-drop Info palette instance island layer layout layout viewports limits line font line width linetype lineweight mirror mode model model viewports model space Glossary | 163 . (VPORTS) One of the two primary spaces in which objects reside. Objects that are created in paper space that display views. A final layout of specific views and annotations of this model is placed in paper space. (MIRROR) A software setting or operating state. How a line or type of curve is displayed.Term grips Definition Small squares that appear on objects you select. See also layout viewports and viewport. A logical grouping of data that are like transparent acetate overlays on a drawing. (ASSIST) See block reference. you edit the object by dragging it with the pointing device instead of entering commands. Multiple layouts can be created for each drawing. Typically. A two. A type of display that splits the drawing area into one or more adjacent rectangular viewing areas. Quick Help in the Info palette continually monitors the commands in progress and displays information that is directly related to the active command or dialog box.

See also object snap mode. See also running object snap and object snap override. and modification. such as styles and definitions. Methods for selecting commonly needed points on an object while you create or edit a drawing. and dimension text origins. Properties that are common to all objects include color. lines. and viewport configurations. dimension definition points. Settings that control the appearance and geometric characteristics of objects. See also zoom. For nonuniform rational B-spline curve. the origin of a Cartesian coordinate system is where the X. linetype. See also B-spline curve. (PAGESETUP) To shift the view of a drawing without changing magnification. Formerly called entity. Y. or polylines.mnu.0.0. dimension styles. layers. manipulation. For example.Term named object Definition Describes the various types of nongraphical information. text styles. and 3D thickness. block definitions. Limits pointing device input to horizontal or vertical (relative to the current snap angle and the user coordinate system). See also zoom. See also Object Snap mode and running object snap. layer. views. circles. treated as a single element for creation. See also snap angle and user coordinate system (UCS). (ORTHO) A method of naming and saving plot settings. Named objects include linetypes. such as text. layouts. Named objects are stored in definition (symbol) tables. dimensions. linetype scale. and Z axes meet at 0. A B-spline curve or surface defined by a series of weighted control points and one or more knot vectors. Also called a shortcut menu. (PROPERTIES) A geometric symbol that is displayed when the cursor moves over an object. The point where coordinate axes intersect. One or more graphical elements. stored with a drawing. See also shortcut menu. (PAN) node NURBS object object properties Object Snap markers object snap menu Object Snap mode object snap override origin Ortho mode page setup pan 164 | Glossary . it is defined in the POP0 section of aclt. An object snap specification to locate points. The menu that is displayed in the drawing area at the cursor location when you hold down SHIFT and right-click the pointing device. Turning off or changing a running Object Snap mode for input of a single point.

Term paper space Definition One of two primary spaces in which objects reside. For example.0. Plot styles are applied at plot time. dithering. See also Polar Snap. PEDIT) An object property that specifies a set of overrides for color. (PSPACE) The button on a pointing device that is used to select objects or specify points on the screen. See object properties. gray scale. screening. the pick button is the left button. pick button pickbox plan view pline point pointing device polar array PolarSnap polar tracking polyline plot style plot style table prompt properties Glossary | 165 . and fill styles. such as a mouse or a digitizing puck. (PLINE. A set of plot styles. and Z coordinate values. Paper space is used for creating a finished layout for printing or plotting. Model space is used for creating the drawing. A precision drawing tool that displays temporary alignment paths defined by user-specified polar angles. Also called pline. joinstyles. A view orientation from a point on the positive Z axis toward the origin (0. lineweight. The square cursor used to select an object in the drawing area. 1. some of which may be customized to perform commands you specify. A message on the command line that asks for information or requests action such as specifying a point. A location in three-dimensional space specified by X. Plot styles are defined in plot style tables and apply to objects only when the plot style table is attached to a layout or viewport. 2. Y. that can be used to interact with the interface and create and edit drawing objects in the drawing area. Objects copied around a specified center point a specified number of times. You design your paper space viewports using a layout tab. An object consisting of a single coordinate location. linetype. See also polar tracking.0). (ARRAY) A precision drawing tool used to snap to incremental distances along the polar tracking alignment path. You design your model using the Model tab. A pointing device usually has several buttons. pen assignments. An object composed of one or more connected line segments or circular arcs treated as a single object. See also model space. (POINT) A device. endstyles. as opposed to doing drafting or design work. (PLAN) See polyline. on a two-button mouse.

which is controlled separately by GRID. (PROPERTIES) A feature that removes unused definitions such as block definitions. (OSNAP) 1. Snap grid does not necessarily correspond to the visible grid. layers. Snap grid does not necessarily correspond to the visible grid. snap grid. (SCALE. snap resolution. The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid points according to the spacing set by Snap. for example. and text styles from a drawing. The area at the bottom of the application window that contains buttons controlling the mode of operation of the program and displays the coordinates of the cursor location in the drawing area. and Polar Snap. The menu displayed at your cursor location when you right-click your pointing device. which is controlled separately by GRID. F2. See also Object Snap mode and object snap override. Also known as accelerator keys. Setting an Object Snap mode so it continues for subsequent selections. LTSCALE. the values of default properties common to all objects. such as whether an object is selected or a command is in progress. and so on) are also shortcut keys. (SNAP) The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid points according to the spacing set by Snap.Term properties palette Definition Lists and changes properties of the selected object or set of objects or. ZOOM) One or more selected objects that a command can act upon at the same time. The display size of the components of noncontinuous linetypes and hatches. purge relative coordinates running object snap scale selection set shortcut keys shortcut menu snap snap angle snap grid Snap mode spline status bar 166 | Glossary . (SNAP) See B-spline curve and NURBS. CTRL + S saves a file. (SNAP) A mode for locking a pointing device into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid. See snap angle. The proportional size of an object compared with other objects. The snap resolution defines the spacing of this grid. The apparent size of objects in a view with respect to a drawing sheet. if no objects are selected. The shortcut menu and the options it provides depend on the pointer location and other conditions. (PURGE) Coordinates specified in relation to previous coordinates. 2. See also Object Snap mode. Keys and key combinations that start commands. 3. HPSCALE. The function keys (F1. When Snap mode is on. CELTSCALE. the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point on the grid.

VIEW) See model viewports and layout viewports See also view. A hierarchical list that can be expanded or collapsed to control the amount of information displayed. DVIEW. oblique. See also block library. and Z axes in 3D space. such as DWGNAME. and the Help system. mirrored. See block. See definition table and block definition table. the Purge dialog box. See also viewport. (LAYER) See model viewports. (VPOINT. Readonly system variables. A location where edges or polyline segments meet. and placing blocks and hatches. sharing. or limit. cannot be modified directly by the user. or set in a vertical column. compressed. A representation of an item commonly used in drawings. (VPORTS) template drawing text style thaw tiled viewports tool palette toolbar tree view UCS UCS icon user coordinate system (UCS) vertex view viewport Glossary | 167 . A setting that displays previously frozen layers. A graphical representation of a model from a specific location (viewpoint) in space. See also freeze. Contains plot styles and their characteristics.dwt and acltiso. The UCS determines the default placement of geometry in a drawing.Term strings STB file symbol symbol library symbol table system variable Definition A sequence of text characters entered at a prompt or in a dialog box. A collection of block definitions stored in a single drawing file. A name similar to a command used as a mode. A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings such as aclt. size. See also world coordinate system (WCS). For plot style table file. (UCSICON) A user-defined coordinate system that defines the orientation of the X. Y. saved collection of settings that determines the appearance of text characters—for example. tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window that provide an efficient method for organizing. any drawing can be used as a template. Part of the interface containing icons that represent commands. stretched. An icon that indicates the orientation of the UCS axes. A named.dwt. See user coordinate system (UCS). however. Tree views are available in DesignCenter.

To reduce or increase the apparent magnification of the drawing area. See external reference (xref).Term window selection Definition A rectangular area specified in the drawing area to select multiple objects at the same time. (ZOOM) xref zoom 168 | Glossary . See also crossing selection and polygon window selection.

Index

A
absolute coordinates, 76, 159 accelerator keys (shortcut keys), 166 actions, undoing, 39 Add-A-Plotter wizard, 151 aliases, command, 36, 160 aligned dimensions, 132, 142, 159 aligning text, 128 analyzing drawings, 113 angles angle overrides, 82, 159 angular units, 159 calculating, 113 hatch patterns, 123 polar coordinates, 76 polar tracking, 81 rotation angles, 95 specifying for arcs, 70 text characters, 128 angular dimensions, 132, 134, 143, 159 angular units, 159 annotations, 134, 139, 159 architectural drawing unit format, 50 architectural templates, 49 arcs drawing, 70 drawing polylines with, 68 filleting, 71, 96 regenerating view of, 44 areas finding for objects, 102 selection areas, 88 arrays, 155, 159 arrowheads, 134, 140, 159

associative dimensions, 18, 134, 159 associative hatches, 121, 159 attribute definitions, 159 Autodesk DWF Viewer, 155 Auto-hide feature, 30, 36, 61, 160 AutoSnap markers, 78, 83 axes for coordinates, 76

B
B-spline curves, 160 backwards-reading text, 128 base points, 92, 95, 160 baseline dimensions, 132, 143 black-and-white plotting, 154 blank areas within hatches (islands), 122, 163 block attributes, 118 block definition tables, 160 block definitions, 160 block instances (block references), 160 block libraries, 118, 120 block references, 160 blocks, 116, 118, 160 block attributes, 118 block definition tables, 160 block definitions, 160 block references, 160 inserting, 119 moving, 120 overview, 16 sources of, 118 title blocks, 156 typical uses, 118 See also block libraries

bold fonts, 128 boundaries editing, 98 extending objects, 90 hatched areas, 122 polylines, 103 text objects, 126 trim boundaries, 108 buttons, toolbar, 35 BYBLOCK property, 160 BYLAYER property, 63, 65, 66, 160

C
calculating distances, angles, or coordinates, 113 calibrating plotters, 152 callouts (leader lines), 18, 134, 139 Cancel command, 39 Cartesian coordinates, 76 center marks, 132, 138, 140 center snap, 80 centering views, 136 centerlines, 138, 140 chain dimensions (continued dimensions), 132, 143, 160 chord length, specifying for arcs, 70 circles, 38, 44, 70, 96, 105 circumscribed polygons, 69 closing polylines, 68 color-dependent plot style tables (CTB), 152, 161 colors applying to objects, 62 assigning to layers, 6, 54, 62 color-dependent plot style tables, 152, 161 command aliases, 36, 160 command line, 36, 160 command window, 32, 36, 160 commands aliases, 36, 160 canceling or undoing, 39 choosing, 34 dynamic prompts, 37 editing commands, 88 ending, 39 help and information, 26 options, 36 repeating, 39 starting at command line, 36 context-sensitive Help, 29 continued dimensions, 132, 143, 160 coordinates and coordinate systems absolute and relative coordinates, 76, 159, 166 calculating delta, 113 Cartesian coordinates, 76 dynamic input and, 77 origin point, 76, 104 overview, 76

coordinates and coordinate systems (continued) polar coordinates, 76 specifying, 12 COPY command, 86 copying multiple copies of objects, 93 objects, 86, 92 properties to other objects, 110 corners, filleting, 96 counter-clockwise rotation, 95 crosshairs, 160 See also cursors crossing selection areas, 88, 161 CTB files (color-dependent plot style tables), 152, 161 current layers, 54, 63 current linetypes, 64 current object scale settings, 65 cursor menus. See shortcut menus cursors dynamic prompts displayed by, 37 panning with, 43 pickbox cursor, 83 snapping to a grid, 74 zooming in or out with, 42 cutting edges, 90

D
DC Online tab (in DesignCenter), 120 decimals drawing unit format, 50 rounding on screen, 51 defaults defined, 161 property settings, 61 definition tables, 161 deleting objects, 89 delta, calculating, 113 deselecting objects, 88 Design Web Format (DWF) files, 151, 155 DesignCenter, 32, 161 accessing and inserting blocks, 16 DC Online tab, 120 hatch patterns in, 121 sources of block libraries, 118 diameter dimensions, 132, 143 diameters, 70 digital signatures, 161 dimension lines, 134 Dimension Style Manager dialog box, 140 dimension styles, 140, 161 dimension text, 134, 161 dimension variables, 161 dimensions and dimensioning accuracy, 12 associative dimensions, 18, 134

170

|

Index

dimensions and dimensioning (continued) center marks and centerlines, 138, 140 creating, 135, 142 dimension styles, 140, 161 dimension variables, 161 editing dimensions, 142 editing properties, 62 elements of dimensions, 134 grips, 142 layers for, 135, 136 moving dimensions, 142 overview, 134 saving styles in templates, 8 scaling, 149 standards for, 141 text, 140, 161 types of, 18, 134, 142 units of measurement, 141 DIMSCALE system variable, 137 direct distance entry, 81, 93, 161 displaying command options, 37 display scale, 136 grid, 74 Info palette, 30 layers, 55 properties, 61 Properties palette, 61 regenerating jagged display, 44 toolbars, 35 viewport properties, 150 DIST command, 86, 113 distances calculating, 113 direct distance entry, 81, 161 measuring, 86 polar coordinates, 76 polar tracking, 81 dividing polylines, 69 docking toolbars, 35 Drafting Settings dialog box, 75, 79 Draw toolbar, 32 drawing area, 32, 161 drawing extents, 161 drawing interchange format (DXF) files, 162 drawing limits (grid limits), 74, 162 drawing objects arcs, 70 circles, 38, 70 filleting, 96 lines, 37, 67 overview, 10 polygons, 67, 69 polylines, 67 rectangles, 68 drawing scale. See scales and scaling drawing templates. See templates drawing units, 2, 49, 50, 161

Drawing Units dialog box, 51 drawings and drawing files coordinate systems, 76 displaying entire drawings, 42 grids, 74 inserting blocks, 119 new drawings, starting, 48 panning view, 43 plotting, 153 revising, 20 revision clouds, 112 Snap mode, 74 templates, 48 touring, 56 zooming in or out, 14 drivers, printer, 151 DWF (Design Web Format) files, 151, 155, 162 DWT files. See templates DXF files, 162 DYN button, 77 dynamic input, 77

E
editing objects associative hatches and, 121 copying properties, 110 dimensions, 142 duplicating objects, 92 erasing objects, 89 extending objects, 90 filleting, 96 grip edit mode, 111 mirroring, 94 object boundaries, 98 offsetting copies, 94 overview, 20 precision editing, 97 properties, 61, 109 revising drawings, 20 revision clouds, 20, 112 selecting objects to edit, 88 text, 126 text styles, 128 trimming objects, 90 editing plotter configurations, 152 editing text, 126, 128 ellipses, 96 ending commands, 39 Endpoint object snap, 80, 107 endpoints, 68, 70 engineering drawing unit format, 50 entities. See objects ERASE command, 89 erasing layout viewports, 150 ESC key, 34 EXPLODE command, 69

Index

|

171

132 I i-drop. 163 In-Place Text Editor. 162 formatting dimensions. 54. 128 Layer Properties Manager. 26. 162 viewport grips. 25 hiding Info palette. 162 global scale factor for linetypes. 162 fitting options for dimensions. 149 layers. 65 graphics area of screen (drawing area).exploding objects. 135. 96 fills. 63 dimensions on. 139 horizontal alignment of text. 116. 136 editing properties. 6. 128 G geometry. 121 L labels in model and paper space. 74 grid limits. 50 Text Formatting toolbar. 122 sources of. 142 editing objects. 162 grids. 99 islands. 86 filleting objects. 113 inscribed polygons. 30 layers. 122. 163 ISO standards. 80. 86. 141 flipping objects (mirroring objects). 121 islands within boundaries. 121. 120. 90 extending objects. 88 editing dimensions. 63 Properties palette. 140 extents. 26 Help system. 71. 24. 69 joining polylines. 162 creating outlines with. 90. drawing. 54. 74. 120 displaying. 35 hatches and hatch patterns. 162 external references (xrefs). 111 grip modes. 163 intersection snap. 146. 156 instances (block references). 71. 128 Help command Help. 120 inserting blocks. 126 inquiry commands. 162 overview. 140 drawing units. 122 points for creating. 128. 48. 121 inserting. 86. 51 freezing layers. 100 extension lines. 62 172 | Index . 161 grid limits. 55. 35 hook lines. 94. 54. 163 color assignments. 163 block grips. 24 H handles (move handles). 163 fonts. 74 grip modes. 128 horizontal dimensions. 74 turning off and on. 162 height of text characters. 150 J jagged display. 121 italic fonts. 29 table of contents (Contents tab). 61 toolbars. 134. 119. 35 floating viewports (layout viewports). 126 fractions. 69. 162 EXTEND command. 32. 163 imperial measurement drawing template files. 49 Info palette. 74. 55. 62 current layers. 74 spacing. 83 displaying or hiding. 55. 30. 29 Quick Help feature. 69 K keyboard shortcuts (shortcut keys). 121 associative hatches. 48 JOIN command. 166 keywords in Help system. 162 F FILLET command. 162 grips. 50. 44 JIS standards. 106 floating toolbars. 24 procedural. 69 Insert dialog box. 27 tutorials. 63.

163 Model tab. 46. 2. 34. 93 Index | 173 . 16. 65 notes and labels in. 64 Linetype Manager. 128 scale vs. 95 panning view. 66. 81 polylines. 120 dimensions. 64. 50 lines angles. 138. 94. 67 exact length. 6. 60. 163 editing properties. 129 viewports. 86. 81 extension lines on dimensions. 46. 63. 118 DesignCenter. 96 hook lines. 61 linetype assignments. 74. 166 metric measurement template files. 55. 163 compared to models. 140 dimension styles. See linetypes line widths (lineweights). 65 identifying objects with. 156 modes. 109 global scale factor. 50 switching to model space. 49.layers (continued) freezing. 163 models and model space. 35 moving blocks. 136 linetypes in. 112 matching properties between objects. 163 zooming in or out. 2. defined. 4. 35 multiple copies of objects. 6. 120 limits. 32. 6. 43 rotating objects. 32. 10 parallel. 64 linetypes. 149 Layers toolbar. 134 toolbars. 163 locking layers. 6. 146. 50. 134. 6 organizing drawings with. 67 tapering. 55. 163 analyzing drawings. 163 leader lines (callouts). 6. 52 model viewports. 52 dimensioning and. 54 viewports layer. 52 display scale. 35. 34 lengthening objects. 55 toolbars. 139 linetypes. 4. 150 text size in. 49 mechanical drawing unit format. 35 M magnifying view in viewports. 153 scale vs. 53 text size and. 140 drawing. 129 linetypes in. 37. 146. 55 hiding or displaying. 66 lineweights. 55 naming. 120 DesignCenter Online. 163 linear dimensions. 62 rearranging. 134 left mouse button. 6 properties and. 53 switching to paper space. 146. 54 plot styles. 132. 67 perpendicular. 46. 54 overview. drawing units. 163 layouts. 64 overview. 90 libraries block libraries. 8 scaling. 82 centerlines. 66. 66. 134. 113 compared to layouts. See linetypes lineweights. 106. 52 page setups and. 63 saving styles in templates. 65 overview. 52 formulas for text size. 162 line fonts. 32. 49 midpoint snap. 149 Layer Properties Manager. drawing units. 141 mechanical drawing templates. 61 layout tab. 52 layout tabs. 146. 139 leader lines. 134. 163 offsetting. 64 locking. 156 Layers toolbar. 142 linear measurements. 6. 95 text in dimensions. 129 viewports. 32 menus. 136 drawing in model space. 46 layer assignments. 153 plotting from. grid. 139 leader objects. 65 Lineweight Settings dialog box. 46. 32 layout viewports. 54. 165 move handles on toolbars. 2. 163 mouse devices. 110 measurement units. 80 mirroring objects. 63. 134 filleting. 50 switching to layouts. 18. See zooming in or out markup revision clouds. 34. 104 menu bar. 69 Linetype Manager. 142 objects.

111 hatch patterns. 6. 153 PAN command. 86 offsetting objects. 134. 153 Plot Style Manager. 153 page setups. 92 editing properties. 153 plot scales. 164 overriding. 153 Page Setup Manager. 152. 166 snap grid. 140 O object properties. 83 creating outlines with. 128 NURBS (nonuniform rational B-spline curves). 80 objects. 152. 76. 165 plotter configuration (PC3) files. 34. 81 perpendicular snap. 151 page setups. 164 overlays. 29 New Features Workshop. 89 filleting. 135 markers. 164 Ortho mode. 61. 153 text. 164 page size.N named layers. 151 driver support for. 62 copying properties. 105 opening block libraries. 104. 164 notes. 153 plot styles. 165 plines. 12 AutoSnap markers. 132. 149 drawing. 88 P page orientation. 128 OFFSET command. 95 offsetting copies. 35. 165. 164 object snap markers. 150 text size and. 86. 24 New Page Setup dialog box. 94. 152. 43. 14. 152 Plotter Configuration Editor. 142 orientation pages. 121 PC3 files. 166 spacing. 67. 134 colors. 132. 154 nodes. 152 navigation Help system display. 110 displaying on layers. 146. 62 erasing. 79 snap angles. 78. 153. 164 objects (continued) trimming edges. 164 associative dimensions. 165 pickbox cursor. 90 oblique text. 151 Plotter Configuration Editor. 152 plot style tables (STB) files. 94 properties. 164 nonuniform rational B-spline curves. 164 object snaps accuracy and. 49 ordinate dimensions. 155 paper space. 26 Info palette information. 152 configuring plotters. 164 rotating. 164 object snap overrides. See polylines Plot dialog box. 151 perpendicular lines. 94 moving. 165 compared to model space. 146. in model and paper space. 152 Plotter Manager. 166 Snap mode. 129 parallel dimensions (baseline dimensions). 165 plan views. 109. 83 cycling through snap points. 128 origin points. 10 duplicating. 164 paper size. 6 overriding dimension styles. 10. 53. 164 Object Snap menu. 120 templates. 60. 67 PAT files. 80 pick button. 6 named objects. 164 overview. 67. 146. 121 linetypes. 164. 143 parallel lines. 52 notes and labels in. 167 plot styles. 74 running object snaps. 65 switching to model space. 63 lineweights. 152 174 | Index . 78 dimensions and. 96 grips. 128 scaling linetypes in. 43 panning. 95 selecting. 4. 74 types of. 83. 164 Object Snap mode. 66 mirroring. 151 plotters and plotting calibration. 164 named plot style tables.

143 raster files. 152 PostScript files. 29 prompts. 60 matching. 152 Plotter Configuration Editor. 68 dividing or joining. 32. 61. 153 printers calibrating. 34 right-clicking actions. 20. 61. 166 specifying for arcs. 166 dimensions. 129 views in viewports. 65 lineweights and. 164 polar coordinates. 76. 140 Index | 175 . 37. 83 calculating distance or coordinates. 155 files in other formats. 36. 61 pull-down menus. 78. 153 previewing. 110 editing. 109. 70 specifying for polygons. 137 drawing units compared to scale. 32. 39. 104. 159 AutoSnap markers. 165 PolarSnap. 110 Properties palette. 109. 109 layer assignments. 50 hatch patterns. 67. See coordinates and coordinate systems origin points. 34 rotating objects. 34. 166 S saving files as DWF files. 136 text. 126 toolbars. 166 Properties toolbar. 80. 152 selecting plotters. 96 specifying for arcs. 112 regenerating jagged display. 150 revising drawings. 44. 65 text objects. 42. 60 assigning. 34 purging. 153 support for. 165 closing. 165 polygons. 44 relative coordinates. 152 plot styles and plot style tables. 104. 152 rectangles. 103 widths. 70 polar arrays. 151 previewing plot areas and settings. 165 polar coordinates. 151 procedural Help. 2 plot scales. 89 repeating commands. 76 relative coordinates. 66 overview. 76 polar tracking. 61. 76 removing objects. 24 R radius filleting objects. 64. 93 resizing linetypes. 166 Q Quadrant object snap. 109 viewing. 96 highlighting boundaries. 166 Properties toolbar. 132 Quick Reference card. 69 ports. 29 Quick Leader dimensions. 165 points. 106 Quick Help feature. 134. 20. 76. 123 linetypes. 69 radius dimensions. 26. 153 printing viewport borders. 62 Properties palette. 153 Plotters folder. 81. 165 absolute coordinates. 12. 95. 157 setting up.plotters and plotting (continued) plotting from layouts. 166 relative values. 67. 79. 70 specifying for circles. 88 redline drawings. 76. 132. 69 polylines. 35 viewports. 153 setting display scale. 70 specifying for circles. 50 secondary dimension styles. 68 rectangular selection areas. 151 raster graphics quality. 69 filleting. 151 scales and scaling. 151 pointing devices. 62. 150 scaling in model space. 112 right mouse button. 76. 60 copying to other objects. 120 running object snap. 113 coordinate systems. 4 scientific drawing unit format. 165 properties. 112 See also editing objects revision clouds. 2.

8 DWT files. 128. 96. 141 tool palettes. 105 tangent snap. 161 In-Place Text Editor. 35 overview. 140 See also blocks system variables. 128 saving styles in templates. 167 title blocks. 134. 166 shortcut menus. 140. 140 Standard toolbar. 126 shortcut keys. 167 DesignCenter Online. 167 strings. 35 Properties toolbar. 120 opening. 32 toolbar buttons. 70 starting drawings. 166 sharp corners on objects. 8 styles. 123 splines. 70. 49 selecting deselecting objects. 129 width of. 32. 128. 140 overriding. 68. 32 switching between model space and paper space. 167 tiled viewports (model viewports). 49 sample files. 139 dimension text. 167 hiding or displaying. 8 extension lines. 128 Styles toolbar. 156 tolerance options for dimensions. 88 objects. 35 toolbars docking. 167 drafting standards and. 69 templates. 32. 48 status bar. 167 thawing. 167 undoing actions. 128 smoothing display. 126 viewports and. 16. 48. 164 STANDARD style. 53 between page setups. 167 UCS icon. 35. 2. 128. 134. 166 sizing linetypes. 126 toolbars. 35 Layers toolbar. 78 topics in Help system display. 166 solid fills. 44 Snap and snapping. 140 plot styles. 126 model vs. 140. 35 moving. 161 drafting standards. 121. 152. 167 in dimensions. See object snaps snap angles. 150 between models and layouts. 88 selection sets. 126 Text Formatting toolbar. 150 slant of text characters. 152 text styles. 166 shortcuts cycling through snap points. 35 tooltips. 35. 141 drawing units. 61 locking. 128 text styles. 128 tutorial drawing templates. 34. 120 symbols defined. 90 TrueType fonts. 118. paper space. 80 tapering lines. 162 opening. 96 shortcut keys. 26 transparency of palettes. 153 symbol libraries. 167 styles dimension styles. 167 Tool Palettes window. 74 hatch patterns. 61 resizing. 35 toolbars. 167 Text Formatting toolbar. 55. 65 text objects. 49 text annotations. 167 T table of contents in Help system. 35 viewports. 88 selection areas. 86. 108 TRIM command. 8. 166 snap grids. 166 Snap mode. 167 trim boundaries. 160. 30 tree views.Select Template dialog box. 50 176 | Index . 166 STB files (named plot style tables). 161. 78 editing text. 126 Text Style dialog box. 27 tangent method for drawing circles. 32 start points. 39 units of measurement in dimensions. 88. 162 spacing grid and snap settings. 49 U UCS (user coordinate system). 32.

128 user coordinate system (UCS). 32 window selection areas. 167 vector graphics quality. 151 X X and Y values. 42. 155 creating. 14. 55 V variables dimension variables. 168 overview. 65 model space and paper space overview. 152 vertical alignment of text. 42 sizing. 128 vertical dimensions. 88. 156 views. 155 overlapping. 52 modifying. 149 display scale. 43 plotting borders. 150 properties. 168 Z ZOOM command. 150 W wheel mouse. 149 multiple viewports. 150 grips. 161 system variables. 69 text characters. 156 Index | 177 . 167 displaying entire drawings. 150 overview. 42. 134 upside-down text. 4. 14. 161. 128 text objects. 150 scaling views. 4. 167 viewports. 4 panning. 32 viewports (continued) zooming in or out. 132 vertices. 49 updating dimensions and leader lines. 43 repositioning. 150 linetype scaling in. 149 erasing. 42 scaling views in viewports. 136 displaying layered objects. 168 Windows printer drivers. 126 window interface elements. 34. 167 user interface elements. 44 width polylines. 42 zooming in or out. 42 panning. 146 changing settings. 76 xrefs (external references).units of measurement (continued) template files. 43 See also viewports visibility of layers.

178 .